adp augusta expansion - storage.googleapis.com augusta expansion concrete accessories ... preformed...

Technical Specifications for the

ADP

Augusta Expansion

Core/Shell

Design Development Documents

22 January, 2016

Prepared by:

226 Walnut Street Philadelphia, PA 19106 (215) 925-6562 Structural Engineer Brinjac Engineering 114 North Second Street Harrisburg, PA. 17101 (717) 233-4502 Mechanical/Electrical Larsen Binkley 310 West 20th Street, Suite 200 Kansas City, MO 64108 (816) 997-9613 Civil Engineer Lowe Engineering 990 Hammond Dr., Suite 900 Atlanta, GA 30328 (770) 857-8449

Lighting Design Brinjac Engineering 114 North Second Street Harrisburg, PA. 17101 (717) 233-4502

ADP Augusta Expansion TABLE OF CONTENTS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 TOC- 1

SECTION TOC – TABLE OF CONTENTS

BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS: (By Others)

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE:

Section 032500 Concrete Accessories Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 034500 Architectural Precast Concrete

DIVISION 4 MASONRY:

Section 042000 Unit Masonry Assemblies

DIVISION 5 METALS:

Section 051200 Structural Steel Section 052100 Steel Joists and Joist Girders Section 053100 Metal Decking Section 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Section 055000 Metal Fabrications Section 055110 Metal Stairs Section 058110 Architectural Joint Systems

DIVISION 6 WOODS AND PLASTICS:

Section 061053 Miscellaneous Carpentry Section 061600 Sheathing

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION:

Section 071310 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing Section 072100 Building Insulation Section 072726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers Section 074120 Metal Wall Panels Section 074264 Composite Metal Wall Panels Section 075430 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing Section 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 077200 Roof Accessories Section 078420 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems Section 079205 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS:

Section 081113 Steel Doors and Frames Section 084110 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Section 087120 Door Hardware Section 088000 Glazing Section 089110 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

ADP Augusta Expansion TABLE OF CONTENTS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 TOC- 2

DIVISIONS 9 FINISHES: Not Used

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES:

Not Used

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT:

Not Used

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS:

Section 124840 Floor Mats and Frames

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION:

Not Used.

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS:

Section 142010 Hydraulic Elevators

DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK

Section 312010 Earthwork for Building

DIVISION 33 UTILITIES

Section 334600 Foundation Drainage System

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

ADP Augusta Expansion CONCRETE ACCESSORIES NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 52 00- 1

SECTION 032500 – CONCRETE ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of concrete accessories.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the following: 1. ASTM Standard Specifications:

a. D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

b. E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. c. E1745 - Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill

under Concrete Slabs.

1.4 LEED® SUBMITTALS

A. Documentation of waste diversion quantities for Credit MR2.

B. Product Data for Credit MR4 on Material Report from Division 1 Section “LEED® Requirements,” indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: 15 mil Green, by Griffolyn/Reef Industries; or equal.

B. Vapor Retarder Accessories: 1. Mastic Tape: Griffolyn Fab Tape; or equal. 2. Repair Tape: Griffolyn Griff Tape; or equal. 3. Pipe Boots: Griffolyn Pipe Boots; or equal.

C. Other Materials: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of concrete accessories shall be as selected by Contractor subject to the approval of Engineer.

ADP Augusta Expansion CONCRETE ACCESSORIES NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 52 00- 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install Concrete Accessories: 1. As indicated on the Drawings. 2. As specified in various other Sections. 3. As necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.

B. Vapor Retarder: 1. Install vapor retarder on smooth compacted subgrade. 2. Lap joints and seal with continuous mastic tape. 3. Seal around penetrations with pipe boots and mastic tape. 4. Repair damage to vapor retarder with repair tape, and with additional vapor retarder if

required. 5. Turn vapor retarder up and trim off flush with building floor slab where no expansion

material is indicated. END OF SECTION 032500

ADP Augusta Expansion CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete

materials, mix design, concrete topping, placement procedures, and finishes.

1. Footings, foundations and grade beam.

2. Slab-on-grade, non-architectural.

3. Isolated slabs.

4. Concrete walls.

5. Composite floor deck, non-architectural.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section “Quality Control Testing Services.”

2. Division 01 Section “Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection Services.”

3. Division 05 Section “Structural Steel”.

4. Division 05 Section “Steel Deck”.

5. Division 23 for HVAC equipment pads.

6. Division 23 for Plumbing equipment pads.

7. Division 26 for Electrical equipment pads.

8. Division 31 Section "Earthwork For Buildings" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

9. Division 31 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Reference Specifications: The specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials

(ASTM) referred to in these specifications are listed below with their serial designation. The

latest revisions (at the time of bidding) of the specifications listed below are declared to be a

part of these specifications, the same as if fully set forth elsewhere herein:

1. A615 - Specifications for Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

2. A616 - Specifications for Rail-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

3. A82 - Specifications for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.

4. A617 - Specifications for Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

5. A184 - Specifications for Fabricated Steel Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.

6. A185 - Specifications for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

7. C10 - Specifications for Natural Cement.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 2

8. C31 - Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test Specimens

in the Field.

9. C33 - Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.

10. C39 - Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders.

11. C42 - Methods of Securing, Preparing and Testing Specimens from Hardened Concrete

for Compressive and Flexural Strengths.

12. C94 - Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

13. C109 - Test for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars.

14. C131 - Method of Test for Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate by Use of the Los Angeles

Machine.

15. C138 - Method of Test for Weight per Cubic Foot Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric)

of Concrete.

16. C143 - Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.

17. C150 - Specifications for Portland Cement.

18. C171 - Specifications for Waterproof Paper for Curing Concrete.

19. C172 - Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete.

20. C173 - Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric

Method.

21. C175 - Specifications for Air-Entraining Portland Cement.

22. C192 - Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test

Specimens in the Laboratory.

23. C595 - Blended Hydraulic Cements.

24. C231 - Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure

Method.

25. C260 - Specifications for Air-Entraining Admixtures.

26. C309 - Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

27. C350 - Specifications for Fly Ash for Use as an Admixture in Portland and Cement

Concrete.

28. C402 - Specifications for Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolans for Use as Admixtures in

Portland Cement Concrete.

29. C494 - Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

30. D994 - Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous

Type).

31. D1751 - Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint fillers for Concrete Paving and

Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

32. D1752 - Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and

Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Nonbituminous Types)

B. Standards of Practice: Detailed recommendations for acceptable practices, while not

necessarily a part of these specifications, are available in the following standards and

recommendations of the American Concrete Institute (ACI) and the Concrete Reinforcing Steel

Institute (CRSI):

1. ACI 214 - Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Compression Test Results of Field

Concrete.

2. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings

3. ACI 315 - Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.

4. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

5. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

6. ACI 306 - Recommended Practice for Winter Concreting.

7. ACI 305 - Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 3

8. ACI 309 - Consolidation of Concrete.

9. ACI 211 - Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete.

10. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing and Placing Concrete.

11. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforced Bars.

12. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports Specification and

Nomenclature.

C. All standards and recommendations shall be the latest revisions of same at time of bidding.

D. Codes and Regulations: Except as herein qualified, matters pertaining to measuring, mixing,

placing and testing of concrete; construction of formwork; detailing, fabricating and accessories

shall be governed by the following codes and regulations:

1. Building Codes Regulations for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318).

2. Current "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures"

(ACI 315).

3. Current "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing and Placing Concrete" (ACI

314).

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended

hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica

fume.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation

indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.

Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For liquid floor treatments and curing and sealing

compounds, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a

replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements, and for

equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements.

C. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of

materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared

according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material,

grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete

reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete

structures. Use of Contract Drawings as Foundation Shop Drawings shall not be permitted.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 4

E. Construction and Control Joint Layout Drawings with joints clearly labeled, for slab on grade

and elevated slabs.

F. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional

engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and engineering of

formwork are Contractor's responsibility.

1. Shoring and Re-shoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping

formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing re-shoring.

G. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

H. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results

for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing

of current materials:

I. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items

complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.

2. Form materials and form-release agents.

3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

4. Admixtures.

5. Waterstops.

6. Curing materials.

7. Floor and slab treatments.

8. Bonding agents.

9. Adhesives.

10. Epoxy joint filler.

11. Joint-filler strips.

12. Repair materials.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in

construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed

for formwork and shoring and re-shoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this

Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete

Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 5

D. Comply with applicable articles of Division 1 Section “Quality Assurance Testing and

Inspection Services.”

1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the

same manufacturer.

F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding

Code--Reinforcing Steel."

G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

1. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,

paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not

exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to

resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

C. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic

concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally

sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 6

F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of

concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane

of the exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in

diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing

or waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Steel Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.

C. Steel Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into

flat sheets.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to

CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-

reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars

true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows:

1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 7

2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than

18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less

than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3-mm) sieve, and less

than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50 (0.3 mm).

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-

soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other

admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.

F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of

fluids through joints. Factory-fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. PVC Waterstops:

a. Greenstreak.

b. Meadows: W. R. Meadows, Inc.

c. Murphy: Paul Murphy Plastics Co.

d. Progress Unlimited Inc.

e. Sternson Group.

f. Tamms Industries Co.; Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals North America,

Inc.

g. Vinylex Corporation.

h. Westec Barrier Technologies; Div. of Western Textile Products, Inc.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 8

C. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium

bentonite or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Volclay Waterstop-RX; Colloid Environmental Technologies Co.

b. Conseal CS-231; Concrete Sealants Inc.

c. Swellseal Joint; De Neef Construction Chemicals (U.S.) Inc.

d. Hydrotite; Greenstreak.

e. Mirastop; Mirafi Moisture Protection, Div. of Royal Ten Cate (USA), Inc.

f. Adeka Ultra Seal; Mitsubishi International Corporation.

g. Superstop; Progress Unlimited Inc.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Vapor Retarder: See Division 3 Concrete Accessories.

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448,

Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a

No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

2.8 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS

A. Finish: See Part 3 of this Section, “Finishing Floors and Slabs”.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene

sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18

to 22 percent solids.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,

Type 1, Class A.

F. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:

a. AH Clear Cure WB; Anti-Hydro International, Inc.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 9

b. Klear Kote WB II Regular; Burke Chemicals.

c. Safe-Cure & Seal 20; ChemMasters.

d. High Seal; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.

e. Safe Cure and Seal; Dayton Superior Corporation.

f. Aqua Cure VOX; Euclid Chemical Co.

g. Cure & Seal 309 Emulsion; Kaufman Products Inc.

h. Glazecote Sealer-20; Lambert Corporation.

i. Dress & Seal WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

j. Vocomp-20; W. R. Meadows, Inc.

k. Metcure; Metalcrete Industries.

l. Cure & Seal 150E; Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation.

m. Rich Seal 14 percent E; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.

n. Kure-N-Seal WB; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.

o. Florseal W.B.; Sternson Group.

p. Cure & Seal 14 percent E; Symons Corporation.

q. Seal Cure WB 150; Tamms Industries Co., Div. of LaPorte Construction

Chemicals of North America, Inc.

r. Hydro Seal; Unitex.

s. Starseal 309; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.

2. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound:

a. Klear-Kote Cure-Sealer-Hardener, 30 percent solids; Burke Group, LLC (The).

b. Polyseal WB; ChemMasters.

c. UV Safe Seal; Lambert Corporation.

d. Lumiseal WB Plus; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

e. Vocomp-30; W. R. Meadows, Inc.

f. Metcure 30; Metalcrete Industries.

g. Vexcon Starseal 1315; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2. Types I and II, non-load-bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 10

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match

adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,

and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that

can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6 mm).

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as

recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa) at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory

trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:

1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.

B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs

for the laboratory trial mix basis.

C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).

2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm).

3. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8

inches (200 mm) after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch (50- to 100-mm)

slump.

D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:


2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. (320 kg/cu. m).



NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 11

E. Supported Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:



F. Building Frame Members: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:



3. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8

inches (200 mm) after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch (50- to 100-mm)

slump.

G. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of

cementitious materials other than Portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements.

H. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

Portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

I. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low water

permeability.

J. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 for concrete exposed to deicers or subject

to freezing and thawing while moist.

K. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in

concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or

minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size.

2. Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch- (25-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size.

3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size.

L. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and supported slabs. Do not allow

entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent.

M. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of

cement.

N. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer)

in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial

slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a

water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 12

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94,

and furnish batch ticket information.

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94

and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32

deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

C. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to

ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least one and

one-half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before

any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds

for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project

identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water

added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete

structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch.

2. Class B, 1/4 inch.

3. Class C, 1/2 inch.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 13

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for

forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork

is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to

prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous

locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates,

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that

does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than

50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not

be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are

maintained.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 14

B. Leave formwork, for beam soffitts, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports

weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:

1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or

laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.

3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without

loosening or disturbing shores.

C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply

new form-release agent.

D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete

surfaces unless approved by Professional.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643

and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack

weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize

sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of

adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 15

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at

locations indicated or as approved by Professional.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through

sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms

with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into

concrete.

3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder

intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,

near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened

or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction or Control Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at

least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting

action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops

random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and

other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch

(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7

Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is

required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Joints for Concrete Slab on Metal Deck

1. Construction joints for slab on metal deck shall be placed to limit the area of concrete to

2,000 square feet maximum between joints unless noted otherwise on drawings.

2. Joints running parallel to floor beams shall be placed midway between floor beams and

shall cross floor girders within a distance of 4 feet from their ends unless noted otherwise

on drawings.

3. Joints running parallel to floor girders shall be placed at a distance of 4 feet from the

centerline of the girder unless noted otherwise on drawings.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 16

4. Keys shall be implemented for all construction joints.

5. The welded wire fabric shall be carried through the joint.

3.7 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a continuous diaphragm.

Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress

of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,

according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically fastening and firmly

pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Batch ticket for concrete shall clearly indicate mix design numbers which correlates with

approved mix design.

C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless

approved by Professional.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix.

D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed

on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot

be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid

segregation.

E. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a

manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still

plastic, to avoid cold joints.

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and

procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the

vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm)

into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have

begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to

consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded

items without causing mix constituents to segregate.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 17

F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleed water appears

on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C),

uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture

temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C)

at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete

on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

H. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as

follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32

deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control

temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing

water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed

ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding

ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. This shall apply to concrete surfaces not

exposed to view.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 18

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and

defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or

covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing,

veneer plaster, or painting.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete

surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform

color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing

process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick

paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part Portland cement to one and one-

half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white

Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match

adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens,

rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part

Portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water.

Add white Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout

will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a

swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent

unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, re-straightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-

floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds

for ceramic or quarry tile, Portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor

finishes.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 19

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small

or inaccessible to power driven floats. Re-straighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.

Repeat float passes and re-straightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular

texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be

covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or

sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and re-straighten until surface is free

of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that

would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with

resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or

another thin film-finish coating system

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to

ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-

grade.

b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15; for supported

slabs.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling,

to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either

thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still

plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and

elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish

with Professional before application.

G. Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: For all exposed concrete interior surfaces, after

initial floating, apply mineral dry-shake materials to surfaces according to manufacturer's

written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly apply mineral dry-shake materials at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq. ft. (49 kg/10 sq.

m), unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer.

2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of mineral dry-shake materials over

surface by hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow

power floating with a second mineral dry-shake application, uniformly distributing

remainder of material, and embed by power floating.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 20

3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound

recommended by dry-shake material manufacturer and apply immediately after final

finishing.

4. All interior exposed concrete slab surfaces shall receive a floor hardener finish.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated,

after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with

in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to

complete Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still

green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and

terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as

shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,

complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.

Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish

concrete surfaces.

3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306R for cold-weather protection and with recommendations

in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and

during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a

combination of the following methods:

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a

combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 21

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped

at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less

than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover

material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor

coverings.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair

damage during curing period.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to all floors and slabs in a continuous

operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.

Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating

and repair damage during curing period. Curing and Sealing Compound shall be

compatible with final floor finish.

3.13 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to all

hardened concrete floor slabs by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Curing and Sealing Compound shall be compatible with final floor finish.

3.14 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact

faces of joint clean and dry.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Professional. Remove

and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Professional's approval.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 22

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two

and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for

handling and placing.

1. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,

cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the

surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

2. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in

depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,

and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching

mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone

plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

3. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and

standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding

color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match

before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher

than surrounding surface.

4. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by Professional.

C. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces

sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, pop outs,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of

width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired

areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.

Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather

edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low

areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor

elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,

by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,

square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around.

Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.

Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without

coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.

Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 23

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and

loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to

match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

D. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Professional's approval, using epoxy adhesive

and patching mortar.

E. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Professional's

approval.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General:

1. Concrete materials and operation will be tested and inspected as work progresses. Failure

to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when

such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Professional for final acceptance.

2. Comply with Division 1 Section “Quality Control Testing Services” for sampling and

testing of concrete.

3. Testing of field curing test cylinders or testing required because of changes in materials

or proportions of the mix requested by the Contractor, as well as any extra testing of

concrete or materials occasioned by their failure to meet specification requirements, shall

be at the Contractor's expense.

B. Testing Services by Quality Control Agency:

1. The Owner reserves the right to have check tests performed in accordance with Division

1 Section “Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection Services” on any and all testing and

inspections required by Division 1 Section “Quality Control Testing Services.”

2. Conduct strength tests of the concrete in accordance with the following procedures:

a. The responsible Contractor shall secure composite samples in accordance with

"Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete" (ASTM C172). Each strength test shall be

obtained from a different batch of concrete on a representative, truly random basis,

avoiding any selection of the test batch other than by a number selected at random

before commencement of concrete placement. When pumping or pneumatic

equipment is used, samples shall be taken at the discharge end. Concrete test

cylinders shall be made by the responsible Contractor under observation of the

Resident Inspector. The cylinders shall be molded, and twenty-four (24) hour

initial curing provided, in strict compliance with ASTM C31. Immediately

thereafter a responsible representative of the Quality Control Agency shall pack

them in a sturdy container, furnished by the responsible Contractor, and as

approved by the Quality Control Agency, surround them with wet sand or sawdust,

protect them from freezing and transport them to the laboratory where they shall be

cured in strict compliance with ASTM C31 until time of test. The cylinders shall

be sequentially numbered and a record of date made and date transported to the

laboratory kept by the Resident Inspector. A copy of this record shall be

forwarded to the Resident Inspector. Unless this record reflects any exceptions, it


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 24

will be assumed that these procedures have been followed to the mutual

satisfaction of the Contractor, the testing laboratory, and the Resident Inspector.

The Inspector must call the testing laboratory the day the cylinders are cast, and

confirm on the proper form the date and time of the telephone call to the Testing

Laboratory. Above mentioned record shall also include results of slump tests and

temperature for each sample (See This Section)

b. Specimens shall be tested in accordance with "Method of Test for Compressive

Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders" (ASTM C39). Two specimens shall be

tested at 28 days for acceptance and two shall be tested at 7 days for information.

The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two

specimens tested at 28 days. If one specimen in a test manifests evidence of

improper sampling, molding or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength of the

remaining cylinder shall be considered the test result. Should both specimens in a

test show any of the above defects, the entire test shall be discarded. When high

early strength concrete is used, the specimens shall be tested at the ages indicated

in the contract documents.

c. Samples for strength tests of each class of concrete (each concrete mix design)

shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once for each 100 cu.yd. of

concrete or for each 3000 sq.ft. of surface area placed. Not less than five (5)

strength tests (4 cylinders per test) shall be conducted for each concrete mix

design.

1) The air content of concrete of normal weight shall be determined on a

regular and frequent basis in accordance with either "Method of Test for Air

Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" (ASTM C231),

"Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method" (ASTM C173) or "Method of Test for weight per

Cubic Foot, Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete" (ASTM

C138).

3.17 EVALUATION OF CONCRETE STRENGTH

A. Evaluation of Test Reports:

1. Test results for standard molded and standard cured test cylinders shall be evaluated

separately for each specified concrete mix design. Such evaluation shall be valid only if

tests have been conducted in accordance with procedures specified in this Section.

2. For evaluation of potential strength and uniformity, each specified mix design shall be

represented by at least five tests.

B. Satisfactory Strength Level of Concrete: The strength level of the concrete will be considered

satisfactory so long as the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or

exceed the specified strength f'c, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified

strength f'c by more than 500 psi.

C. Testing of Concrete in Place:


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 25

D. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by the

Professional to determine relative strengths at various locations in the structure as an aid in

evaluating concrete strength in place or for selecting areas to be cored. Such tests shall not be

used as a basis for acceptance or rejection.

E. Core Tests:

1. Where required, cores at least 2 inches in diameter shall be obtained and tested in

accordance with "Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of

Concrete" (ASTM C42). If the concrete in the structure will be dry under service

conditions, the cores shall be air dried (temperature 600 to 800 F, relative humidity less

than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. If the concrete in the

structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, the cores shall be

tested after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C42.

2. At least three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in

place that is considered potentially deficient. The location of cores shall be determined

by the Professional so as to least impair the strength of the structure. If, before testing,

one or more of the cores shows evidence of having been damaged, subsequent to or

during removal from the structure, it shall be replaced.

3. Concrete in the area represented by a core test will be considered adequate if the average

strength of the cores is equal to at least 85 percent of, and if no single core is less than 75

percent of, the specified strength f'c.

4. Core holes shall be filled solid with low slump concrete or mortar as specified in this

Section.

3.18 ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE

A. General:

1. Completed concrete work that meets all applicable requirement will be accepted without

qualification.

2. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements but which has

been repaired to bring it into compliance will be accepted without qualification.

3. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements and which

cannot be brought into compliance may be accepted or rejected as provided in these

specifications.

B. Concrete Compressive Strength: If the concrete fails to meet the compressive strength

requirements of this Section additional curing as specified by the Professional may be required

and modifications including change in the concrete mix design may be required for the

remaining concrete work, all at the expense of the Contractor.

C. Dimensional Tolerances:

1. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines smaller than required, by an amount

exceeding the requirements of Section 203.1 of "Recommended Practice for Concrete

Formwork" (ACI 347) shall be considered deficient in strength and subject to the

provisions of this Section.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 26

2. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlined larger than required, by an amount

exceeding the requirements of Section 203.1 of "Recommended Practice for Concrete

Formwork" (ACI 347) may be rejected and the excess material shall be subject to

removal. If removal of the excess material is permitted, it shall be accomplished in such

a manner as to maintain the strength of the section and to meet all other applicable

requirements of function and appearance.

3. Concrete members cast in the wrong location may be rejected if the strength, appearance

or function of the structure is adversely affected or the misplaced items interfere with

other construction.

4. Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces exceeding the requirements of Section 203.1 of

"Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork" (ACI 347) or this Section and which

are exposed to view may be rejected and shall be repaired or removed and replaced if

required.

5. Finished flatwork exceeding the tolerances of this Section may be repaired provided that

strength or appearance is not adversely affected. High spots may be removed with a

terrazzo grinder, low spots filled in with an approved patching compound, or other

remedial measures performed as permitted.

D. Appearances:

1. Concrete exposed to view with defects that adversely affect the appearance of the

specified finish may be repaired, if possible. If, in the opinion of the Professional, the

defects cannot be repaired, the concrete may be accepted or rejected as provided in these

specifications.

2. Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection for defective appearance.

E. Strength of Structure - Potential Deficiency:

1. The strength of the structure in place will be considered potentially deficient if it fails to

comply with any requirements which control the strength of the structure, including but

not necessarily limited to the following conditions:

a. Low concrete strength as evaluated by this Section.

b. Reinforcing steel size, quantity, strength, position, or arrangement at variance with

the requirements of this Section or contract documents.

c. Concrete that differs from the required dimensions or location in such a manner as

to reduce the strength.

d. Curing less than that specified.

e. Inadequate protection of concrete from extremes of temperature during early stages

of hardening and strength development.

f. Mechanical injury as defined in this Section, construction fires, accidents or

premature removal of formwork likely to result in deficient strength.

g. Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength. Structural Analysis and/or

additional testing may be required when the strength of the structure is considered

potentially deficient.

2. Core tests in accordance with this Section may be required when the strength of the

concrete in place is considered potentially deficient.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 30 00 - 27

F. Failure to Meet Requirements:

1. The Construction Manager and the Professional reserve the right to reject any or all items

that do not meet the requirements of the plans and specifications and will require the

Contractor to replace these items with the Contractor bearing all expenses in connection

with such replacements.

2. If strength tests of concrete fail to meet the minimum requirements as specified herein,

the concrete represented by such tests shall be considered questionable and shall be

subject to further testing at the expense of the Contractor.

3. Additional tests of questionable concrete shall be conducted at the expense of the

Contractor in accordance with "Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and

Sawed Beams of Concrete" (ASTM C42) as deemed necessary by the Professional.

4. Additional tests of the hardened concrete may be required by the Professional if in their

opinion there is cause for concern over the adequacy of the structure regardless of the

results of any previous tests. If initial test requirements had been met, the Contractor

shall not be required to bear the costs of such additional tests unless their results confirm

the concrete in place is deficient.

5. If core tests fail to demonstrate strengths adequate for the intended purpose of the

member or members in question, as determined by the Professional or are inconclusive or

impractical to obtain or if structural analysis does not confirm the safety of the structure,

load tests may be required and their results evaluated in accordance with Chapter 20 of

"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI 318).

6. Concrete work judged inadequate by the Professional based on structural analysis or by

results of a load test shall be reinforced with additional construction if so directed by the

Professional or shall be replaced, at the Contractor's expense.

7. Except as provided earlier in this Paragraph, the Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in

providing the additional testing and/or analysis required by this Section.

8. If the structural members are accepted on the basis of tests other than the original

cylinder tests, the Contractor shall compensate to the Owner for the Contractor’s failure

to meet specified strength requirements by paying to the Owner one hundred ($100)

dollars per cubic yard for each one hundred pounds per square inch below the specified

strength. The original laboratory cured 28 day test cylinder results only shall be used to

determine the difference between specified and furnished strengths.

END OF SECTION 03 30 00

ADP Augusta Expansion ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE NELSON Project 15.00742.01 03 45 00- 1

SECTION 03 45 00 – ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the design, furnishing and installation of architectural precast concrete. Major locations of architectural precast concrete include: 1. Horizontal spandrel panels. 2. Load bearing and non-load bearing column covers. 3. Infill panels.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the following: 1. ACI:

a. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. b. 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. c. 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.

2. APA - Architectural Precast Association: a. Color and Texture Selection Guide.

3. ASTM: a. A36 - Carbon Structural Steel. b. A153 - Zinc-Coating (Hot-dip) on Iron and Steel Products. c. A185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. d. A276 - Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. e. A283 - Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. f. A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. g. A416 - Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete. h. A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. i. A666 - Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar. j. A706 - Low-Allow Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. k. A775 - Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. l. A884 - Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Fabric for Reinforcement. m. C33 - Concrete Aggregates. n. C150 - Portland Cement. o. C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. p. C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. q. C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. r. C979 - Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. s. F593 - Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Head Cap Screws and Studs.

4. AWS - American Welding Society: a. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.


b. D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. 5. CRSI -Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute:

a. Manual of Standard Practice. 6. PCI - Prestressed Concrete Institute: 7. MNL-117 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast

Concrete Products. a. MNL-120 - PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete.

1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architectural Precast Supplier: Responsible for the structural design of: 1. Architectural precast concrete. 2. Connections.

B. Design Loads: 1. Calculated by architectural precast supplier in accordance with 2006 International Building

Code and Georgia supplements 2. Dead Loads. 3. Wind Loads: As indicated on the Drawings. 4. Seismic Loads: As indicated on the Drawings. 5. Handling and erection loads. 6. Thermal loads.

C. Modifications: 1. Only as necessary to meet field conditions and to ensure proper fitting of the work. 2. Only as acceptable to Architect. 3. Maintain general design concept without increasing or decreasing sizes of members or

altering profiles and alignment indicated on the Drawings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Literature: For precast concrete units: 1. Installation and care instructions. 2. Laboratory test reports, including water absorption test reports for units with exterior

exposure.

B. Shop Drawings to include the following: 1. Dimensions and cross-sections. 2. Details of fabrication and installation. 3. Fabrication tolerances. 4. Location, size and type of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. 5. Lifting devices necessary for handling and erection, including procedure for precast units,

sequence of erection, and erection tolerances. 6. Layout, including limits of each finish (as applicable). 7. Identification of each precast unit corresponding to sequence and procedure of installation. 8. Welded connections by AWS standard symbols. 9. Inserts, connections and joints, including accessories and construction at openings in precast

units. 10. Joints, including expansion joints (soft type) and grouted joints (rigid type). 11. Locations and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in other construction.


12. Establish design intent for appearance, profiles and unit sizes. 13. Modifications to the basic building structure to accommodate precast unit design will not be

considered.

C. Calculations: Provide complete design calculations prepared by a professional engineer licensed in Georgia.

D. Samples: Submit for each finish (as applicable) of precast concrete unit as follows: 1. Approximately 12-inch x 12-inch x 2-inch Samples. 2. Quantity as required to illustrate full range of color and texture of surface finish expected.

E. Concrete Mix Designs: 1. Submit for each type of concrete proposed for the architectural precast concrete. 2. Required Information.

a. Dry weights of cement. b. Saturated surface-dried weights of fine and coarse aggregate. c. Quantities, type and name of all mix design components and admixtures. d. Weight of water. e. Compressive strength test data.

3. Submit at least 15 days prior to start of precast unit production. 4. Do not begin precast unit production until Architect has reviewed mix designs.


A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications: 1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials. 2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Submittals. 3. With a minimum of 3 years successful experience in erection of architectural precast

concrete units similar to units required for this project 4. Fabricator: Certified under the APA or PCI Plant Certification Program, or under other

quality control program acceptable to local building official in accordance with building code, prior to fabrication, enabling fabrication to occur off Site without special inspection.

5. Welders: Qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 and D1.4.

B. Design Personnel Qualifications: Licensed professional engineer experienced in providing engineering services that have resulted in successful installation of architectural precast concrete units similar in material, design, and extent as required for this Project.

C. Quality Control Standards: 1. PCI MNL-117. 2. AWS D1.1. 3. AWS D1.4.

D. Inspection: In accordance with Division 1 Section “Inspection Services.”

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.


B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration, damage, contamination with foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. 1. Deliver precast concrete units to project Site in such quantities and at such times to ensure

continuity of installation. 2. Deliver anchorage items to be embedded in other construction before start of such work.

Provide setting diagrams, templates, instruction and directions as required for installation. 3. Lift and support units only at designated lifting or support points as indicated on the

Drawings or the reviewed Shop Drawings.

C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Formwork: 1. Provide forms and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or other

acceptable material that is nonreactive with concrete and will produce required finish surfaces.

2. Unless forms for prestressed concrete units are stripped prior to detensioning, design forms so that stresses are not induced in precast units due to deformation of concrete under prestress or due to movement during detensioning.

B. Reinforcing: 1. Bars: ASTM A615 or A706, Grade 60. 2. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185, flat sheets. 3. Supports:

a. Including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing.

b. In accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and PCI MNL-117. c. For exposed-to-view concrete where legs of supports are in contact with forms,

provide supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2).

C. Prestressed Tendons: 1. Uncoated, 7-Wire:

a. Stress-relieved strand complying with ASTM A416. b. Grade 250 unless Grade 270 is indicated.

2. Strand similar to above, but having size and ultimate strength of wires increased so that ultimate strength of the strand is increased approximately 15%, but with fewer number of wires per strand, may be used at Manufacturer’s option.

D. Concrete Materials: 1. Portland Cement:

a. ASTM C150, Type I or Type III. b. Use only one brand, type and source of supply of cement throughout the Project,

unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. c. Color, size and material as required to achieve color and finish.


2. Coarse Aggregate: a. ASTM C33. b. Hard, durable, selected and graded; free of material that causes staining or reacting

with cement. c. Color, size and material as required to achieve color and finish.

3. Fine Aggregate: a. ASTM C33. b. Natural or manufactured sand of same material as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise

acceptable to Architect. c. Color, size and material as required to achieve color and finish.

4. Water: Drinkable, free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete and embedded steel.

5. Admixtures: a. Coloring Admixtures: ASTM C979. b. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. c. Water-Reducing, Retarding, or Accelerating Admixtures:

1) ASTM C494, type as selected by fabricator. 2) Containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions.

6. Fly Ash: Fabricator’s standard, at fabricator’s option.

E. Carbon Steel Connection Materials: 1. Plates: Structural quality, hot-rolled carbon steel, ASTM A36 or A283, Grade C. 2. Shapes: ASTM A36. 3. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, low-carbon steel bolts, regular hexagon nuts and carbon steel

washers. 4. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 5. Welded Studs: Comply with AWS D1.1. 6. Finish of Steel Units:

a. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153. b. Hot-dip galvanize connections to be exposed to the exterior.

F. Grout Materials: Cement Grout: 1. Portland cement and clean, natural sand complying with ASTM C404. 2. Mix at ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required

for placement and hydration.

2.2 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Proportioning: 1. Prepare mix design for each type of concrete required. 2. Mix designs may be prepared by independent testing facility or by qualified manufacturing

plant personnel, at precast fabricator’s option. 3. Proportion Mixes:

a. By either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods. b. Using materials to be employed on the project for each type of concrete required,

complying with ACI 318. 4. Limit fly ash, if used, to 25% of Portland cement weight. 5. Limit water soluble chloride ion content in accordance with ACI 318.

B. Mix Designs:


1. Standard-weight concrete consisting of specified Portland Cement, aggregates, admixtures and water to produce the following properties: a. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi minimum at 28 days. b. Total Air Content: Not less than 4% nor more than 6%. c. Water Absorption: Not to exceed 6% by weight.

2. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: a. Mix design adjustment may be requested when characteristics of materials, job

conditions, weather, test results or other circumstances warrant. b. Laboratory test data for revised mix designs and strength results must be submitted to

and accepted by Architect before using in the Work. 3. Admixtures:

a. Use air entraining admixture in strict compliance with Manufacturer’s directions. b. Admixtures to increase cement dispersion or provide increased workability for low-

slump concrete may be used subject to Architect’s acceptance. c. Use amount as recommended by admixture Manufacturer for climatic conditions

prevailing at time of placing. d. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain quality control.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Forms: 1. Construct forms mortar-tight and of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to

concrete placing operations, temperature changes, and when concrete is prestressed, pretensioning and detensioning operations.

2. Maintain formwork to provide completed precast concrete units of shapes, lines and dimensions indicated, within specified fabrication tolerances.

B. Fabricate Units: 1. Straight, smooth and true to size and shape, with exposed edges and corners precise and

square unless otherwise indicated. 2. Precast units that are warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or otherwise defective will

not be acceptable.

C. Cast-In Items: 1. Provide reglets, slots, holes and other accessories in units to receive dowels, reglets,

flashings, and other similar work as indicated. 2. Provide inserts and anchorages cast into units, for attachment of loose hardware as required.

D. Anchorages: Provide loose steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, clamps, hangers and other miscellaneous steel shapes not provided by other trades, necessary for securing precast units to supporting and adjacent members.

E. Reinforcement: 1. Comply with recommendations in CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and PCI MNL-117 for

fabricating, placing and supporting reinforcement. 2. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth and other materials that reduce or

destroy the bond with concrete. 3. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement during

concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces.


4. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch minimum coverage. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.

5. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least 1 full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Prestressing: 1. Where the units are designed to be prestressed, prestress tendons by either pretensioning or

post-tensioning methods. 2. Delay dimensioning or post-tensioning until concrete has reached its minimum design

release compressive strength as established by test cylinders cured under the same conditions as concrete.

G. Concreting: 1. Mix concrete according to PCI MNL-117 and requirements in this Section. After concrete

batching, no additional water may be added. 2. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from

forming in precast concrete units. 3. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without

dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items. 4. Comply with ACI 306R recommendations for cold-weather concrete placement. 5. Comply with ACI 305R recommendations for hot-weather concrete placement. 6. Identify pickup points of precast architectural concrete units and orientation in structure

with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on the Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast architectural concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure.

7. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL-117, by ambient temperature.

H. Fabrication Tolerances: In accordance with PCI MNL-117.

I. Unit Color and Surface Textures: 1. Fabricate precast units and provide exposed surface finishes as follows:

a. Light or medium sandblast finish. b. Architect to select final color and finish from Supplier’s full range of samples.

2. As-cast or float finish for unexposed surfaces except where exposed to view.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install precast concrete members plumb, level, and in alignment in accordance with PCI MNL-117 and specified limits of erection tolerances.


B. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as members are being permanently connected.

C. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.

D. Accessories: Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for erection of precast units to supporting members and backup materials.

E. Anchoring Units: 1. Install in final position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated. 2. Remove temporary shims, edges, and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring and

grouting are completed. 3. At bolted connections use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of

nuts. 4. Welding:

a. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4. b. Protect precast architectural concrete units from damage by field welding or cutting

operations and provide noncombustible shields as required. c. At welded connections apply rust-inhibitive coating on damaged areas, same as shop-

applied material. Use galvanizing repair coating on galvanized surfaces.


A. Tolerances: In accordance with PCI MNL-117.

B. Repairs: 1. Make repairs to or replace unsatisfactory precast units as required. 2. Limitations as to amount of patching permitted are subject to acceptance by Architect. 3. Repair exposed surfaces of damaged or otherwise unacceptable precast concrete units to

match color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding precast concrete units. 4. In addition to the above, in-place precast units may be rejected for the following:

a. Exceeding specified installation tolerances. b. Damage during construction operations. c. Surface finish deficiencies in exposed-to-view surfaces. d. Other defects as listed in PCI MNL-117.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed facings to remove dirt and stains on units after erection and completion of joint treatments.

B. Wash and rinse in accordance with precast fabricator’s recommendations.

C. Protect other work from damage due to cleaning operations.

D. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the character of exposed concrete finishes.


ADP Augusta Expansion UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES NELSON Project 15.00742.01 04 20 00- 1

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Ties and anchors. 6. Embedded flashing. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 8. Cavity-wall insulation.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing applied to cavity face

of backup wythes of cavity walls. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 3. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping at openings

in masonry walls. 4. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems at heads

of masonry walls. 5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit

masonry.

C. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on

Project.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property

specification. 2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with

compressive strength requirement.



A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 96

inches high. 2. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 3. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.


2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading

coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40

deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Weight Classification: Medium weight. 2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

2.3 BRICK


A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose

unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.

B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS. 1. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C

67. 2. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated

"not effloresced." 3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Products:

a. Green Leaf Brick, 8615 Golf Ridge Drive, Charlotte, NC 28277, (704) 307-0930 b. Equal pre-approved by architect.

2.4 Recycled Content of Brick: Provide products with an average recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 60 percent.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or

crushed stone.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

F. Water: Potable.

2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. 1. Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.


6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: 1. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face

shell of backing wythe and with separate ties that extend into facing wythe. Ties have two hooks that engage eyes or slots in reinforcement and resist movement perpendicular to wall. Ties extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.

C. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and

compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in

both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.

2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. a. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, with

screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 3-5/8 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie.

b. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.188-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

3. Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint.

4. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than 3 exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117.


2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12

feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by

extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,

adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. a. Available Products:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal. 2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier-44. 4) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-

Barrier Wall Flashing. 5) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall

Flashing. 6) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. 7) Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300. 8) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall Flashing. 9) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from urethane or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant

polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Provide one of the following configurations:


a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings.

b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches thick and 10 inches wide, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from being clogged with mortar.

2.10 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, closed-cell product extruded with an integral skin.

B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.

2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

D. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

E. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product. Architect to select from manufacturer's full range.

F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.


Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: 1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less

than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart


around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically. a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties. b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use

adjustable (two-piece) type ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type

reinforcement. b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use

adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

3. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.

B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

C. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing."

D. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. 1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and

masonry.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:


1. Fasten screw-attached and seismic anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Insert slip-in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards.

3. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.

5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.

C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.9 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could

puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe.

3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches.


4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

F. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents. 1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install

through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes

or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

4. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL


A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

END OF SECTION 04810

ADP Augusta Expansion STRUCTURAL STEEL

NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 1

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Structural steel.

2. Grout.


1. Division 01 Section "Quality Control Testing Services" for independent testing agency

procedures and administrative requirements.


3. Division 05 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors.

4. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined

as structural steel.

5. Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A6 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel

Bars, Plates, Shapes , Sheet Piling.

2. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.

3. ASTM A53 - Pipe Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel

Pipe.

4. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality.

5. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

6. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs.

7. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.

8. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in

Round and Shapes.

9. ASTM A572 - High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural

Quality.

10. ASTM A992 - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building

Framing.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 2

11. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Non-shrink).

12. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers

13. ASTM F 959 - Standard Specification for Compressible Washer-Type Direct Tension

Indicators for use with Structural Fasteners.

14. ASTM F 1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105 ksi Yield

Strength.

15. ASTM F 1852 - Standard Specification for “Twist-Off” Type Tension Control Structural

Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile

Strength.

B. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for

Buildings.

2. AISC - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

3. AISC - Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.

D. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council - Painting Manual.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected

or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and

comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified

professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections.

B. Construction: Type 2, simple framing.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:





NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 3

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For primers, documentation indicating that

products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department

of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from

Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Use of Contract Drawings for Shop Drawings shall not be permitted.

3. Include embedment drawings.

4. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld.

5. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

6. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural

analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer, licensed in

Georgia responsible for their preparation.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and testing agency.

F. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with

requirements:

1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties.

2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

3. Direct-tension indicators.

4. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies.

5. Shear stud connectors.

6. Shop primers.

7. Non-shrink grout.

G. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding

Code--Steel."

C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2."

3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic

Design."

4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections."


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 4

5. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members."

6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Regulatory Requirements: Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, Drilled-In Anchors

shall have published ICBO ES Evaluation Reports indicating conformance with current

applicable ICBO ES Acceptance Criteria. Installation of Drilled-In Anchors shall comply with

manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Comply with applicable articles of Division 1 Section “Quality Assurance Testing and




A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off

ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel

members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become

dry or rusty before use.

2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or

structures as directed.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying

the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for

installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M, except where indicated to be A572/A572M, Grade 50

(345).

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Weight Class: Standard.

2. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 5

F. Medium-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 65-35 (Grade 450-240), carbon

steel.

G. High-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 148/A 148M, Grade 80-50 (Grade 550-345), carbon or

alloy steel.

H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex

steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and

ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8,)

compressible-washer type.

a. Finish: Plain

B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy

hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex

carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished

carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.

D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: Straight Hooked.

2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel.

3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.

5. Finish: Plain.

E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.


2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.


4. Finish: Plain.

F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.



3. Finish: Plain.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 6

G. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel.

H. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel.

I. Drilled-In Anchors

1. Wedge Anchors: Wedge type, torque-controlled, with impact section to prevent thread

damage and wedge dimples to prevent spinning during installation, complete with

required nuts, washers and manufacturer’s installation instructions. All wedge anchors

shall be equipped with length identification markings conforming to ICBO ES AC01.

Type and size as indicated on Drawings.

a. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture,

provide carbon steel anchors conforming to ASTM A510 with zinc plating in

accordance with ASTM B633.

b. Exposed Use: In exposed, potentially wet or otherwise corrosive environments,

provide stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel anchors shall be Type 304 or Type

316 stainless steel provided with stainless steel nuts and washers of matching alloy

group and minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum

full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. All nuts shall conform

to ASTM F594 unless otherwise specified. Stainless steel anchors shall not be

installed in contact with galvanized steel, aluminum, or other galvanically

dissimilar metals.

c. Cored Holes: Where wedge anchors are to be installed in cored holes, anchors and

core bits shall have matched tolerances.

d. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with

requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following:

1) Hilti Kwik Bolt II.

2) Approved substitute in accordance with Division 01 Sections.

2. Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchors: Torque-controlled, exhibiting follow-up expansion under

load, with provision for rotation prevention during installation. Type and size as

indicated on Drawings.

a. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture,

provide threaded carbon steel rods conforming to ASTM A36.





full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. All nuts shall

conform with ASTM F594 unless otherwise specified. Stainless steel anchors

shall not be installed in contact with galvanized steel, aluminum, or other

galvanically dissimilar metals.

c. Cored Holes: Where heavy duty sleeve anchors are to be installed in cored holes,

anchors and core bits shall have matched tolerances.

d. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with

requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following:

1) Hilti HSL, HSLG, or HSLB.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 7


3. Capsule Anchors: Threaded steel rod or inserts with 45 degree chisel point, complete

with nuts, washers, glass or foil capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or

methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

Type and size as indicated on Drawings.

a. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture

provide threaded carbon steel rods conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B7.





full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. All nuts shall conform

with ASTM F594 unless otherwise specified. Stainless steel anchors shall not be

installed in contact with galvanized steel, aluminum, or other galvanically

dissimilar metals.

c. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with

requirement and acceptance by the Architects, provide one of the following:

1) Hilti HVA Adhesive System with HVU capsules.


J. Thermal Break Plates: For connections between screen wall posts and roof steel shall utilize

“Armatherm FR Structural Thermal Break” as manufactured by Armadillo or approved

substitution.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.

2.4 GROUT

A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404,

Size No. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water

required for placement and hydration.

B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for

application and a 30-minute working time.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 8

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate

according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's

"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

a. Camber of structural steel members is indicated on the drawings

b. Where possible, camber of beams shall be applied by a cold bend process.

1) The local application of heat may be used to introduce or correct camber,

curvature, or straightness provided the temperature of the heated area, as

measured by temperature crayons or other approved means, does not exceed

1200°F.

2) Where indicated on the drawings in a camber diagram, cantilever or double

cantilever beams shall be cambered for the main span and cantilever end

separately, either by a staged cold bending process or by the application of

heat.

c. Cambers indicated on the drawings are intended to be final cambers at time of

erection.

d. Beams detailed without specified camber shall be fabricated so that after erection

any natural camber due to rolling or shop fabrication is upward.

e. Specified camber for beams at time of erection shall be within a tolerance of minus

zero to plus one-eighth inch for each ten feet of member length.

2. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

3. Milled surfaces of built-up sections shall be completely assembled or welded before

milling.

4. Fitted stiffeners shall be fabricated neatly between flanges, and the ends of stiffeners shall

be milled or ground to secure an even bearing against abutting surfaces. All milled or

ground joints shall bear throughout their contact length.

5. Ends of columns at splices and at other bearing connections shall be finished level and

true. Filler plates used at finished surfaces shall be finished at same time as column,

beam, etc.

6. Splices in Structural Steel: Splicing of structural steel members in the shop or the field is

prohibited without prior approval of the Professional. Any member having a splice not

shown and detailed on approved shop drawings will be rejected.

7. Compression Joints: Compression joints which depend on contact bearing as part of the

splice capacity shall have the bearing surfaces of individual fabricated pieces prepared to

a common plane by milling, sawing, or other suitable means.

8. Cutting: Manual oxygen cutting shall be done only with a mechanically guided torch.

An unguided torch may be used provided the cut is not within 1/8 inch of the finished

dimension and final removal is completed by means such as chipping or grinding to

produce a smooth surface quality free of notches or jagged edges. All corners shall be

smooth and rounded to a minimum 1/2" radius.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 9

9. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel

framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members as shown on the

contract documents, and/or the final shop drawings.

a. Provide specialty items as indicated to receive other work.

b. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes

or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

10. Lifting and Erection Devices: The fabricator shall be responsible for designing, detailing

and furnishing all lifting devices and erection aids required for erection. Such devices

shall be removed after erection if they interfere with architectural finish requirements.

11. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to

metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-

SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of

other work through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes

or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 CONNECTIONS (SHOP AND FIELD)

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop or field install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and

type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Pre-tensioned or Slip critical.

2. Minimum Bolt Diameter: Minimum bolt diameter shall be 3/4 inch.

3. Connection Type: Unless noted otherwise on the drawings or in the General Notes, all

bolted beam and column connections shall use high-strength bolts proportioned as

bearing type connections using standard holes (hole diameter nominally 1/16 inch in

excess of nominal bolt diameter) with threads included in the shear planes.

4. Shear Connection of Welded Moment Connected Pieces: All shear connections of full

strength welded moment connected pieces shall use high-strength bolts proportioned as

slip-critical type connections.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 10

5. Oversize, Short Slotted and Long Slotted Holes: The dimensions and washer

requirements of oversize, short slotted, and long slotted holes shall conform to the AISC

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."

6. Design Strength of Fasteners: The design strength of bolts shall be as specified in the

AISC Specification Table J3.2 and Tables 2 and 3 of the AISC "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."

7. Fastener Tension:

a. High strength slip-critical and bearing type bolts shall be tightened to achieve the

minimum bolt tension as specified in Table 4 of the AISC "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” when all the fasteners of a

joint are tight.

b. Any of the four methods to tighten bolts specified in the section 8 of the AISC

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” may be

used to achieve the minimum bolt tension. The tightening procedure that uses

direct tension indicator washers shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F959.

c. The snug tight condition shall be defined as the tightness that exists when all plies

are in firm contact. This may usually be attained by a few impacts of an impact

wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench.

8. Washers: Washers under the bolt head and/or nut shall be used as required by the AISC

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."

9. High strength bolts proportioned as bearing-type connections shall not be used in

combination with welds to share load transmission in the same connection, as specified in

AISC Specification Section J.1.9.

10. Bolt Lubrication: All bolts shall be well lubricated at time of installation. Dry, rusty

bolts will not be allowed.

11. Impact Wrenches: Properly sized and lubricated air impact wrenches with adequate air

pressure shall be utilized for all bolt installation.

12. New Bolts: All bolts shall be new and shall not be reused.

13. Minimum Strength of Bolted Connections: Except as specified below in "Connections"

or noted otherwise on the drawings, all shop and field bolted connections shall develop

the full tensile strength of the member. All members with bolted moment connections,

noted on the drawings with "MC", shall be bolted to develop the full flexural capacity of

the member, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

B. Bolt field connections, unless otherwise noted or detailed on Drawings.

C. Design shear-type connections for beams to support 1/2 of maximum total uniform load

capacity of beam at spans shown on the Drawings.

D. Complete design of connections for any building area not fully indicated on Drawings. Show

complete design on shop drawings.

E. Typical connection details are indicated on Drawings.

F. Design Procedure:

1. Unless noted otherwise or specifically detailed on the drawings, end connections of

beams and girders shall be designed as flexible and the connection shall accommodate

end rotations of the unrestrained beams. Restrained end connections, noted on the


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 11

drawings as “MC”, shall be designed for the combined effect of bending moment and

shears induced by the rigidity of the connection. Forces to be used in the design are

described below.

2. The design of all steel connections for the project except those specifically detailed on the

drawings, shall be performed under the direct supervision of a registered professional

engineer licensed in the State of Georgia, employed by the fabricator.

3. The fabricator's registered professional engineer shall submit complete design

calculations for each connection. Such calculations shall show details of the assembled

joint with all bolts and welds required. Where pre-designed connections are taken

directly from the AISC Manual or related publications, calculations need not be

submitted provided the job design conditions precisely match those assumed in the

referenced publications, all data extracted from the tables is clearly identified with the

table number, and such connections are so indicated in the calculations submitted.

4. All design calculations shall be sealed by fabricator's registered Professional Engineer.

5. Shop Drawings submitted without complete design calculations will not be reviewed.

G. Design Intent: It is the intention of the plans and specifications that shop connections be welded

or bolted and that field connections be bolted, unless detailed otherwise on the drawings.

H. Restrained (Moment) Connections:

1. Refer to the drawings for Moment Connection Details. Unless noted otherwise on the

drawings, all typical moment connected beams shall have flanges complete penetration

welded in the field to the supporting member and shall develop the full moment capacity

of the member. The shear connection shall be made with single plate web connection and

high strength slip-critical bolts with threads included in the shear plane.

2. Design Reactions for Moment Connected Beams: Shear connections for moment-

connected beams shall be designed for the factored reaction shown on the drawings.

3. Design and Furnishing of Reinforcement in Moment Connected Joints: As part of the

design responsibility outlined above, the fabricator shall design and furnish all additional

reinforcement in moment connected joints to resist the specified design forces unless

otherwise specifically detailed on the drawings. Column sections shall be investigated

for web shear, web yielding, web buckling, and tension. Stiffeners and/or doubler plates

shall be furnished as required by AISC Specification Section K1.

I. Tightening of Bolts in Welded Moment Connections. At moment connections where beams are

complete-joint penetration welded directly to columns or girders in the field, welds shall be

made after installation of erection bolts to draw the pieces together and before the final shear

connection bolts are tightened

J. Column Splices:

1. Compression Splice: Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings all column splices shall

be either bolted compression splices using high strength bearing bolts or welded

compression splices. Splice and filler plate sizes, thicknesses, and number of fasteners or

weld information shall be as shown in Table 11-4 of AISC "Manual of Steel

Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design", 2ND Edition. It shall be the

fabricator’s responsibility to examine the architectural drawings to verify that splice

plates and fasteners do not violate architectural finish requirements.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 12

2. Welded Moment Connection and/or Tension Splice: Where indicated on the drawings,

provide welded moment connection or tension splices using complete-joint penetration

welds at both flanges and web.

3. Pipe and/or Tube Column Splice: Pipe and/or tube column splices shall be partial

penetration field welded using minimum weld sizes as specified in AISC Specification

Table J2.3.

4. Bearing and Fit-Up of Column Compression Joints: Compression joints of all columns

shall have bearing surfaces finished to a common plane by milling, sawing, or other

suitable means. Lack of contact bearing must not exceed 1/16" or corrective measures as

defined by AISC Specification M4.4 shall be required.

K. Base Plates and Bearing Plates:

1. Finish: All baseplates and bearing plates shall be finished in accordance with AISC

Specification M2.8.

2. Attachment to Column: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, all baseplates and

bearing plates shall be welded all around to the column with minimum fillet welds as

specified in AISC Specification Table J2.4.

3. Setting Base Plates: Baseplates shall be set to the elevation indicated on the drawings

and leveled using steel shims (plastic shims will not be allowed) or by three leveling

screws with weldments at the plate edges. Plates shall be grouted using specified non-

shrink non-metallic grout after all protruding plates have been trimmed. Tighten anchor

bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

4. Anchor Rod Holes in Baseplates: Hole sizes in baseplates for anchor rods shall be made

oversize as indicated on the drawings.

L. Struts and Braces:

1. Connections for all struts, hangers, and braces shall have connections designed to develop

the full allowable tensile strength of the member.

2. Compression members composed of two or more rolled shapes separated from one

another by intermittent fillers shall be connected to one another at such fillers at intervals

(not to exceed 48”) so that the slenderness ratio l/r of either shape, between the fasteners,

does not exceed the governing slenderness ratio of the built-up member. The least radius

of gyration, r, shall be used in computing the slenderness ratio of each component part.

M. Bearing of Compression Members: Ends of columns and other compression joints at splices and

other connections which depend on contact bearing as part of the splice strength shall be

finished to bear so as to provide complete true bearing in accordance with AISC Specification

M2.6 and M4.4.

N. Stiffeners: Provide stiffeners finished to bear under all load concentrations on supporting

members, on all members framing over columns, at beam column joints (as required by the

AISC Specification Section K1) and where shown on the drawings.

O. Steel Shelf Angles: Shelf angles supporting veneer shown on the drawings to be continuous

shall be furnished in approximately 8'-0" lengths with two supports per section. Provide a 1/4"

gap at each joint. The gap shall not be welded. Locate joints halfway between supports. Shelf

angles shall be continuous around corners with corner joint complete penetration welded. Shelf

angles shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 13

P. Limitations on Use of A307 Bolts: ASTM A307 bolts shall not be used in any permanent steel-

to-steel or concrete-to-steel connection.

Q. Bolts in Combination with Welds: high strength bolts proportioned as bearing-type connections

shall not be considered as sharing the load in combination with welds for stress transmission in

the same faying face of any connection, as specified in AISC Specification Section J1.9

R. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,

appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of

axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

2. Welder Certification: All shop and field welders shall be certified according to AWS

procedures for the welding process and welding position used.

3. Minimum Size and Strength:

a. Fillet Welds: Minimum size of fillet welds shall be as specified in Table J2.4 in

the AISC Manual of Steel Construction.

b. Partial-Penetration Groove Welds: The minimum effective throat thickness of

partial-penetration groove welds shall be as specified in Table J2.1 in the AISC

Manual of Steel Construction.

c. Minimum Strength of Welded Connections: Except as specified below in

"Connections" or noted otherwise on the drawings, all shop and field welds shall

develop the full tensile strength of the member or element joined. All members

with moment connections, noted on the drawings with "MC", shall be welded to

develop the full flexural capacity of the member, unless noted otherwise on the

drawings.

4. Filler Metal Requirements: Weld metal shall be as specified in AISC Manual of Steel

Construction Table J2.5.

5. Welding Procedure Specification: All welding shall be performed in accordance with a

Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) as required in AWS D1.1 and approved by the

Owner’s Testing Laboratory and the Professional. The WPS variables shall be within the

parameters established by the filler-metal manufacturer.

6. Welding Procedures:

a. Built-up sections assembled by welding shall be free of warpage and all axes shall

have true alignment.

b. Welds not specified shall, if possible, be continuous fillet welds developing the

minimum strength, as specified above, using not less than the minimum fillet

welds as specified by AISC.

c. The toughness and notch sensitivity of the steel shall be considered in the

formation of all welding procedures to prevent brittle and premature fracture

during fabrication and erection.

d. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will produce true alignment

of axes without warp.

e. Before welding is started, the fabricator shall submit for the approval of the

Owner’s Testing Laboratory in consultation with the Professional, written Welding

Procedure Specification for all joints to be welded. After approval, the Welding

Procedure Specification shall be followed without deviation unless specific


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 14

approval for change is obtained from the Owner’s Testing Laboratory and the

Professional.

f. At moment connections where beams are groove welded directly to columns or

girders in the field, welds shall be made after installation of erection bolts to draw

the pieces together and before the shear connection bolts are tightened. Where

loose moment plates are used, such plates shall be groove welded to columns prior

to connecting these plates to the beams.

g. Before welding, particular attention shall be paid to surface preparation, fit up and

cleanliness of surfaces to be welded.

h. Minimum preheat and interpass temperatures for structural steel welding shall be

as specified in the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code, except

that no welding shall be performed when the ambient temperature is lower than 0

degrees F. The temperature shall be measured from the side opposite that upon

which the pre-heat is applied.

i. The heat, input, length of weld and sequence of weld shall be controlled to prevent

distortions. The surfaces to be welded and the filler metals to be used shall be

subject to inspection before any welding is performed.

j. All elements of weldments shall be welded together to full strength of the elements

as specified hereinafter using "V" or "J" grooving except as otherwise indicated on

the structural drawings. All welds shall be continuous and of full penetration

unless fillet welds can develop the minimum required strength as specified above.

Welds made without the aid of a backup bar shall have their roots chipped, ground

or gouged out to sound metal from the second side, before welding is done from

the second side.

k. Welds shall be sound throughout. There shall be no crack in any weld or weld

pass. Welds shall be considered sound if they conform to AWS requirements, as

confirmed by non-destructive testing.

l. Welds shall be free from overlap.

m. Craters shall be filled to the full cross section of the welds.

n. For high-strength low-alloy steels, follow welding procedures as recommended by

steel producer for exposed and concealed connections.

o. Fabricator and erector shall coordinate welding responsibility at all welded joints.

7. Stress Relieving: All welding sequences shall be such as to reduce the residual stresses

due to welding to a minimum value. If high residual stresses are present, stress relieving

of joints shall be required. Welded connections shall be detailed and designed to

minimize the accumulation and concentration of through-thickness strains due to weld

shrinkage.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.

4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

5. Galvanized surfaces.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 15

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and

spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and

standards:

1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not

less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints,

corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection.

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel

according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M.

1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing.

2. Galvanize lintels, shelf angles and all steel having an exterior exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods,

bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with

requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural

steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in

intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,

connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-

place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 FABRICATION

A. Structural material shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop. Assembled pieces shall be

taken apart for the removal of burrs and shavings produced by the reaming operation. Parts not

connected in the shop shall be secured by bolts to prevent damage in shipment and handling.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 16

B. Connections shall be detailed to develop forces shown on the drawing or as noted in these

specifications. One-sided or other types of eccentric connections shall not be permitted.

Surfaces of joints for welded and bolted connections shall be clean bright metal. Fit up of the

parts shall be subject to inspection and approval by the laboratory inspector prior to making

final connection.

1. Holes shall be cut, drilled or punched at right angles to the surface of the metal and shall

not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes in base or bearing plates shall not be drilled.

Holes shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges. Outside burrs resulting from

drilling or reaming operation shall be removed. Holes for bolts shall be 1/16 inch larger

than the diameter of the bolt except as noted on the drawings.

2. Field welded connections will be permitted only where indicated on the drawings.

Welded construction shall conform to the AISC and AWS Specifications.

3. Bolted connections using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts shall conform to the Specifications

for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts. Bolt threads shall be excluded

from the shear planes of the contact surfaces between the connected parts. The bolts shall

be tightened by the “Snug-Tight” method unless tension, bracing, moment, or slip critical

connections are shown, which then shall be installed using the “turn-of-the-nut” method.

4. Splices and field connections shall be made as shown or noted on the drawings. Errors in

shop fabrication or deformation resulting from handling and transportation that prevent

the assembly and fitting or parts shall be reported immediately to the Professional

requesting directions as to method of correction. Corrections shall be made at no

additional cost to the Owner.

C. Milled Surfaces shall comply with the AISC Specifications and the Drawings.

D. The entire bearing area between the bearing or base plate and the concrete base shall be filled

with non-shrink grout. Steel wedges or shims shall be used to level the plate.

E. After assembly, the various members forming parts of a completed frame or structure shall be

aligned and adjusted before being fastened. Tolerances shall conform to AISC. Fastening of

splices of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought

completely into contact.

F. Driftpins may be used only to bring together the several parts, and shall not be used in such

manner as to distort or damage the metal.

G. The use of a gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors is prohibited unless

the Professional has specifically approved such procedure for each use individually in writing.

3.4 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's

"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural

Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 17

B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing

materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface

of base and bearing plates.

1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as

required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or

bearing plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no

voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply

with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before

permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be

in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for

discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

D. Splice members only where indicated.

E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection [unless approved by Professional. Finish thermally

cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1.

F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be

enlarged to admit bolts.

G. Temporary Shoring and Bracing:

1. For this project, all structural steel frames shall be classified as “non-self supporting steel

frames” as defined in the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and

Bridges. All floor and roof deck is classified as a “steel deck diaphragm” and is required

as a diaphragm for the stability of the steel frame during erection unless bracing for this

purpose is furnished by the erector.

2. Design and provide adequate shoring and bracing to safely withstand all loads to which

the structure may be subjected during the construction process. Provide additional

structural members and increase member sizes and/or connections shown on the drawings

as required to accommodate the erection method and equipment.

3. Provide any temporary erection bracing and supports as required to hold structural steel

framing securely in position until the permanent bracing or other steel has been installed

and concrete for floor slabs has obtained 75% of its design strength.

4. Where architectural or MEP requirements do not allow for any temporary supports,

members, erection devices, or connections to be left in place permanently or where such

items affect the final structural behavior, they shall be removed by the erector. All costs

associated therewith shall be included in the bid price.

5. The design of all temporary shoring and bracing is the responsibility of the Contractor.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 18

H. Wherever the erection equipment is supported by the structure, the Contractor shall be

responsible for the retention of a licensed professional engineer to determine the adequacy of

the member supporting the erection equipment in relation to the loads imposed thereon. The

Contractor shall submit to the Professional, for review, the loads that will be imposed by the

erection equipment on the building structure. Where the imposed load exceeds the allowable

strength, the Contractor shall be responsible for any additional materials, supports, bracing,

connections and similar measures required to support the imposed load of the equipment while

in use, subject to review by the Professional.

I. Splices: Splices will be permitted only where indicated on the contract drawings and approved

shop drawings. Fastenings of splices of compression members shall be done after the abutting

surfaces have been brought completely into contact within AISC tolerances. Bearing surfaces

and surfaces that will be in permanent contact are to be cleaned before the members are

assembled.

J. Field Assembly of Structural Steel:

1. As erection of the steel progresses, the work shall be fastened securely to safely carry all

dead load, wind and erection forces. Particular care shall be exercised to ensure

straightness and tautness of bracing immediately upon raising a steel column.

2. Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete

work.

3. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust

various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently

fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact

before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in

elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual members of structure within

specified AISC tolerances. The Contractor shall coordinate with Erector and Fabricator

regarding possible discrepancies in member lengths between temperature at time of

fabrication and temperatures during erection, and shall make necessary adjustments to

ensure plumbness within AISC tolerances at 60°F. Compensate for cumulative welding

draw, construction loadings, sequential applications of dead loads, or any other

predictable conditions that could cause distortions to exceed tolerance limitations.

4. On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds or

filler and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

5. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections,

alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces receiving field welds.

K. Comply with all bolting and welding requirements of Part 2 of this specification section.

L. Field Modifications to Structural Steel: Errors in shop fabrication or deformation resulting from

handling and transportation that prevent the proper assembly and structural fitting of parts shall

be reported immediately to the Professional, and approval of the method of correction shall be

obtained. Approved corrections shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Do not use

cutting torches, reamers, or other devices in the field for unauthorized correction of fabrication

errors.

M. Miscellaneous Framing: Provide supplemental structural steel support framing for metal deck

where normal deck bearing is interrupted by columns, or other framing members or floor

openings whether shown or not on the architectural, mechanical, or structural drawings.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 19

N. Removal of Erection Aids and Devices: The erector shall remove all erection aids and devices

that interfere with architectural finish or MEP requirements.

O. Touch-Up Painting:

1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas that

have been shop painted. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material and surface

preparation as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry

film thickness of 4 mils.

2. Immediately after erection, clean and repaint field welds, bolted connections and abraded

areas that have been galvanized. Prepare surfaces by power disk sanding to bright metal

and apply specified galvanizing repair paint in accordance with ASTM A780.

3. Remove rust, oil, and weld spatter prior to touch-up.

P. Shear Connector Installation:

1. Steel Plates Embedded in Concrete:

a. Studs shall be welded using automatically timed stud welding equipment.

b. Plates must be unpainted and free of heavy rust, mill scale, dirt, sand or other

foreign material that will interfere with the welding operation.

Q. Clean Up: Clean up all debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping the premises neat

and clean at all times.

R. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specification.

S. Make provision for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure

safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent

bracing.

T. Assemble built-up sections by methods that will produce true alignment of axes without warp.

U. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Professional.

V. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas-cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in

structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under

stress, as acceptable to Professional. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance

when permitted.

W. Perform welding according to standards and specifications of the American Welding Society

(AWS) and American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) by certified welders.

X. Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work,

remove at appropriate time.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 20

3.5 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified. Field connections shall comply with the requirements of Part 2 of this Section.

1. Joint Type: As specified in Part 2 of this Section.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,

appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. Field

welding where utilized, shall comply with the requirements of Part 2 of this Section.

1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and

"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic

Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint

on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of

axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally

exposed structural steel comply with Specification Section 05 12 13..

3.6 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations

and other in-place work.

B. Provide templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to

accurate locations.

C. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete and Division 4 in unit

masonry.

3.7 SETTING BASES AND BEARING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials and roughen to

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates.

B. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other

adjusting devices.

C. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior

to packing with grout.

D. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain.

Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 21

3.8 FIELD ASSEMBLY

A. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various

members forming a pert of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening.

B. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly.

Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

C. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.

D. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.

3.9 ERECTION BOLTS

A. On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind

smooth at exposed surfaces.

B. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment,

and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

C. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary

bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.10 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.


A. Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Control Testing Services” for testing and inspection

of high-strength bolted connections and field welds.

B. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.

3.12 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according

to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touch-up Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or re-prime field

connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing

plates, and abutting structural steel.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

2. For Exposed Steel, clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 6 commercial blast cleaning.

3. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 12 00 - 22

C. Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting are specified in Division 09 Painting

Sections.


ADP Augusta Expansion STEEL JOISTS

NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 21 00 - 1

SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDED


1. Open-web K-series steel joists.

2. KCS-type, open-web K-series steel joists.

3. LH-series long-span steel joists.

4. Joist Girders

5. Joist accessories.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete.

2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel bearing plates.

3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for prime painting.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight

Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."

B. Special Joists: Joists requiring modification by the manufacturer to support non-uniform,

unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables

and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."


A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design

loads within limits and under conditions indicated on the drawings.

B. Design joists to withstand design loads with live load deflections no greater than the following:

1. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 21 00 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:




2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For primers, documentation indicating that




C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include

joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories; splice and connection locations

and details; and attachments to other construction. The use of Contract Drawings as Shop

Drawings shall not be permitted.

1. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices and bearing plates to be embedded in

other construction.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

E. Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of bolts certifying that their products comply with

specified requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project

names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information

specified.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard

specifications and load tables.

2. Assumes responsibility for engineering special joists to comply with performance

requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

3. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized

to practice in the State of Georgia and who is experienced in providing engineering

services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for

installations of joists that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,

and extent.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 21 00 - 3

B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables

for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, "Specifications"), applicable to types of joists

indicated.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding

Code--Steel"; and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."


A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Deliver steel bearing plates and other devices to be built into the construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web members.

B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head

bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.

D. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy

hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.2 PRIMERS

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide; FS TT-P-636, red oxide; or manufacturer's standard

shop primer complying with performance requirements of either of these red-oxide primers.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 21 00 - 4

2.3 OPEN-WEB K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-

Series," in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung

ends, and parallel top chord; of joist type indicated.

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists.

B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of

welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

D. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated,

complying with SJI's "Specifications."

E. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications."

F. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist

slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.4 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-

Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series," in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle

top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as follows:

1. Joist Type: LH-series steel joists.

2. End Arrangement: Underslung.

3. Top-Chord Arrangement: Parallel.

B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of

welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

D. Camber long-span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications."

E. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist

slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.5 JOIST GIRDERS

A. Manufacture joist girders according to "Standard Specifications for Joist Girders" in SJI's

"Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; with end and top-chord

arrangements as follows:

1. End Arrangement: Underslung with bottom-chord extensions.

B. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joist girders.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 21 00 - 5

C. Camber joist girders according to SJI's "Specifications."

2.6 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of

material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing,

and span.

B. Bridging: Fabricate as indicated and according to SJI's "Specifications."

1. Furnish additional erection bridging if required.

C. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated.

D. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal

Fabrications."

E. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit

of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished

wall surface, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist

manufacturer to complete joist installation.

2.7 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and

accessories to be primed by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-

SP 3.

B. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a

continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing, with

Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 21 00 - 6

B. Install joists and joist girders and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to

supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written

recommendations, and requirements in this Section.

1. Before installation, splice joists and joist girders delivered to Project site in more than

one piece.

2. Space, adjust, and align joists and joist girders accurately in location before permanently

fastening.

3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that

joists and joist girders are stabilized during construction.

4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions of joists and joist girders to columns or

supports until dead loads have been applied.

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure

with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are

applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or

beams.

3.3 ATTACHMENT TO JOISTS

A. The Contractor shall ensure that no cuts or holes are made in the members of the erected joists

for attachment of ceiling, ducts, pipes, or any other items not specifically shown in the contract

drawings. Use of power driven fasteners in the diagonal and bottom chord members of the

joists is prohibited.

B. The Contractor shall not hang any elements from the top or bottom chords of joists except

ceiling, ducts, pipes or other items specifically shown on the Contract Documents, without the

written authorization of the Professional.

C. All pipes, ducts, and other mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment suspended from the

joists shall have the hanger attached to a joist panel point only. No mechanical, electrical, or

plumbing equipment shall be hung along the top or bottom chord between panel points except

as approved otherwise in writing by the Professional.

D. All ceilings weighing 3 PSF or less may have the grid hung anywhere along the bottom chord.

Ceilings weighing more than 3 PSF shall have the grid hung only at joist panel points.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

inspect field welds.

B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 21 00 - 7

C. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the

following procedures, as applicable:

1. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709.

3. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.

4. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that inspections and test reports have indicated are not in

compliance with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified

requirements.


A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according

to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or re-prime field

connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing

plates, and abutting structural steel.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning,

SSPC-SP 3.

2. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as the shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting are specified in Division 9 Section

"Painting."

D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

installer that ensure joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of

Substantial Completion.


ADP Augusta Expansion STEEL DECKING

NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 31 00 - 1

SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDED


1. Composite steel floor deck.

2. Steel roof deck.



2. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill and reinforcing steel.

3. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel" for shop-welded shear connectors.

4. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous

steel shapes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:




2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For primers, documentation indicating that




C. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing

channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other

construction. The use of Contract Drawings for use as Shop Drawings shall not be permitted.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by steel deck manufacturers certifying that products furnished

comply with requirements.

E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 31 00 - 2

F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following

complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:

1. Mechanical fasteners.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel deck similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in

construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding

Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those

steel deck units tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance

Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.

2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and

inspecting agency.

D. AISI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's

"Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

E. FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM and listed in FM's "Approval Guide,

Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.

F. Comply with applicable articles of Division 1 Section “Quality Assurance Testing and




A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a

waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 31 00 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Steel Deck:

a. Consolidated Systems, Inc.

b. Epic Metals Corp.

c. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Div.

d. Roof Deck, Inc.

e. United Steel Deck, Inc.

f. Wheeling Corrugating Co.; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI

Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 29, and the

following:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),

G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: As Noted On Drawings

3. Profile Depth: As Noted On Drawings

4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As Noted On Drawings

5. Span Condition: Single span.

6. Side Laps: Overlapped.

2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs

and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite

Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 29, the minimum section properties indicated, and

the following:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40 (280),

G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

2. Profile Depth: As Noted On Drawings

3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As Noted On Drawings

4. Span Condition: Minimum double span.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with

requirements indicated.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 31 00 - 4

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, No. 10 (4.8 mm) minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000

psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same

material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Steel Sheet Accessories: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless

otherwise indicated.

G. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of

same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile.

H. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,

finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed end closures: 1/8” steel with hairline joints.

I. Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and

finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

J. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1010 through 1020 headed stud type, cold-finished

carbon steel, AWS D1.1, Type B, with arc shields.

K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a

minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in

SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 31 00 - 5

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned

and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract

side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting

through or adjacent to decking.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,

continuity of decking, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

3.3 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface

diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38

mm) long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds

per deck unit at each support. Space welds 12 inches (305 mm) apart in the field of the

roof and 6 inches (150 mm) apart in roof corners and perimeter, based on roof-area

definitions of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels

between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches (450

mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger carbon-steel

screws.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2

inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof decking and weld

flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least 1

weld at each corner.

E. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover

plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written

instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where

indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

complete closure.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 31 00 - 6

G. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting

structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface

diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an

average of 12 inches (305 mm) apart.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels

between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches (910

mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger carbon-steel

screws.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2

inches (38 mm) with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting

structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,

according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and

sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels, unless

otherwise indicated.


A. Field welds will be subject to inspection by Quality Assurance Testing Agency.

B. Shear connector stud welds will be inspected and tested by Quality Assurance Testing Agency

according to AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:

1. Shear connector stud welds will be visually inspected.

2. Bend tests will be performed at Contractor’s expense if visual inspections reveal less than

a full 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector stud.

3. Tests will be conducted at Contractor’s expense on additional shear connector studs if

weld fracture occurs on shear connector studs already tested according to AWS D1.1.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Professional.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 31 00 - 7

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck

with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


ADP Augusta Expansion COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 40 00- 1

SECTION 05 40 00 – COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the design, furnishing and installation of cold-formed metal framing connections.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the following: 1. ASTM Standard Specifications:

a. A36 - Carbon Structural Steel. b. A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. c. A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. d. A570 - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot Rolled, Structural

Quality. e. A611 - Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Structural Quality. f. A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-

Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. g. A780 - Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. h. C150 - Portland Cement. i. C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. j. C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal

Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033-in. to 0.112-in. in Thickness. k. C955 - Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and

Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases. l. C1007 - Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related

Accessories. m. D520 - Zinc Dust Pigment. n. E119 - Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. o. E488 - Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. p. E1190 - Test Methods for Strength of Powder-Actuated Fasteners Installed in

Structural Members. q. F1554 - Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36-, 55-, and 105-ksi Yield Strength.

2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) publications: Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

3. American Welding Society (AWS) Standards: a. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. b. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

4. Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (CCFSS): Technical Bulletin: AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections.


1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Terms: 1. Load Bearing:

a. An application in which the member is subjected to one or both of the following: 1) Lateral loads exceeding 5 psf. 2) Vertical loads exceeding 200 pounds.

b. All exterior wall members are load bearing members. 2. Non-Load Bearing:

a. All applications other than load bearing. b. In accordance with Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board.”

1.5 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Requirements: 1. Connection details, if any, indicated on the Drawings are minimum requirements. 2. Use stronger details if required as a result of Contractor’s design.

B. Structural Performance: 1. Design framing connections capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under

conditions indicated. 2. Design Loads:

a. Dead Loads: Actual weights of materials and fixed equipment, as calculated by designer.

b. Wind Loads: As indicated on the Drawings. c. Earthquake Loads: As indicated on the Drawings.

3. Design system to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height where

framing supports brick, and 1/360 where framing supports gypsum board and not brick.

4. Design framing connections to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subjected to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 degrees F.

5. Design framing connections to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary structure.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. LEED® Submittals: Product Data for Credit MR4.1 and MR4.2 indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.


A. Installer Qualification: Engage experienced installer who has completed cold-forming metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Welding: Use AWS qualified welders and comply with AWS D1.1 and D1.3 requirements.


C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for fire resistive rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units that have been tested for fire resistance in accordance with ASTM E119 and are acceptable to governing authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Dale Industries, Inc., Dearborn, MI. 2. Dietrich Industries, Inc., Hammond, IN. 3. Marino/Ware Industries, Inc., South Plainfield, NJ. 4. Super Stud Building Products, Inc., Astoria, NY. 5. Unimast Corporation, Schiller Park, IL.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A653, structural steel, zinc coated. 2. Grade 33 for minimum uncoated thickness of 0.0428-inch and less and Grade 50 for

minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538-inch and greater. 3. Coating: G90.

B. Painted Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A570 hot-rolled or ASTM A611 cold-rolled. 2. Cleaned, pretreated, and primed with Manufacturer’s baked-on lead-free and chromate-free,

rust inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements in Fed Spec. TT-P-664. 3. Grade 33 or C, Type 1 or 2, for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428-inch and less

and Grade 40 or D, Type 1 or 2, for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538-inch and greater.

2.3 LOAD BEARING FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: 1. Manufacturer’s standard galvanized C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated or

otherwise required, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C955. 2. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings. 3. Minimum Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.

B. Steel Track: 1. Manufacturer’s standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated or otherwise

required, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C955. 2. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: No less than that of studs track supports. 3. Minimum Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.


2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.

B. Provide accessories of Manufacturer’s standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. End clips. 5. Foundation clips. 6. Gusset plates. 7. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 8. Joist hangers and end closures. 9. Hole reinforcing plates. 10. Backer plates.

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Clips: ASTM A36 steel shapes, zinc coated by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A123.

B. Anchor Rods: 1. ASTM F1554, Grade 36 threaded carbon steel rods and carbon steel nuts, and flat, hardened

steel washers, zinc coated by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A153. 2. Provide hex head, headless hooked, or headless with encased end threaded bolts as

indicated.

C. Expansion Anchors: 1. Fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a

load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2. Hilti; Powers/Rawl; or equal.

D. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: 1. Corrosion-resistant coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws in accordance with

ASTM C954. 2. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, Manufacturer’s standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Minimum 90% zinc- rich coating in conformance with ASTM D520 and applied in accordance with ASTM A780.


B. Cement Grout: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 2. Sand: Clean, natural, ASTM C404. 3. Mix cement and sand at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by volume, with minimum

potable water required for workability and hydration.

C. Plywood Sheathing and Accessories: In accordance with Division 6 Section “Sheathing.”

D. Insulation and Accessories: In accordance with Division 7 Section “Building Insulation.”

E. Gypsum Sheathing and Accessories: In accordance with Division 6 Sections.

2.7 SHOP FABRICATION

A. At Contractor’s option, portions of the cold-formed metal framing may be prefabricated and preassembled prior to installation at the Project Site.

B. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and

with connections securely fastened in accordance with Manufacturer’s written recommendations and requirements of this Section.

2. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 3. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch-cut. 4. Fastening:

a. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator; wire-tying is not permitted:

b. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance, and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

c. Locate mechanical fasteners and install with screws penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

C. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses.

D. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

E. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance

variation of 1/8-inch in 10 feet: 2. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8-inch from plan location. 3. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other

finish materials. 4. Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to an out-of-square tolerance of 1/8-

inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be

field assembled. 2. Install cold-formed framing in accordance with ASTM C1007, unless more stringent

requirements are indicated. 3. Install shop or field fabricated cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting

structure. 4. Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-

line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16-inch.

5. Install cold-formed framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, in accordance with Manufacturer’s written recommendations and requirements of this Section.

6. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 7. Fasten framing members by welding or screw fastening. Wire tying is not permitted. 8. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding and correction of

welding. 9. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for

track or tension members, 10. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in

intensity to those for which structure was designed. 11. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting

structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. 12. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing;

independently frame both sides of joints. 13. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists,

and multiple studs at openings that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. 14. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of Manufacturer’s

standards punched openings. 15. Tolerances:

a. Install framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8-inch in 10 feet.

b. Space individual members no more than ± 1/8-inch from plan location. c. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or

other finishing materials.

B. Walls: 1. Install continuous top and bottom tracks to match studs. 2. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at maximum spacings

as follows: a. Anchor Spacing: 32 inches.


3. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. 4. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks with stud spacings as indicated. 5. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or

warped surfaces and similar configurations. 6. Align studs vertically where wall-framing continuity is interrupted by floor framing. Where

studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. 7. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously

reinforce track to transfer loads. 8. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting

structure. 9. Headers:

a. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. b. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to

supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. c. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame. d. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. e. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same

as full-height wall studs. 10. Blocking:

a. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing where indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

b. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud Manufacturer’s written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

11. Bridging: a. Install horizontal bridging in stud system where studs are not fully braced on both

faces by sheathing. b. Space bridging 48 inches maximum or as required by Manufacturer, if less. c. Fasten at each stud intersection. d. Choose Either Of:

1) Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of a clip angle.

2) Combination of flat, taut steel sheet straps and stud track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat strap to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

12. Diagonal Bracing: a. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at, and fasten

to reinforced top and bottom tracks. b. Fasten clip angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to

structure. 13. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web

stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

C. Sheathing: In accordance with Division 6 Section “Sheathing.”



A. Galvanizing Repair: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint in accordance with ASTM A780 and Manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Touch-Up Painting: 1. Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on fabricated and installed

prime-painted, cold-formed metal framing. 2. Paint framing surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Protection: 1. Protect paper-surfaced gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more than 30

days by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with a securely fastened air-infiltration barrier.

2. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed. 3. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by

applying tape recommended by sheathing Manufacturer at time sheathing is installed.

D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Manufacturer and installer, that ensure cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


ADP Augusta Expansion METAL FABRICATIONS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 50 00- 1

SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the furnishing, fabrication and erection of metal fabrications, including the major items listed below: 1. Loose angle and wide flange lintels. 2. Embedded connections and plates in masonry and cast-in-place concrete. 3. Bollards. 4. Bearing plates for other items specified herein. 5. Expansion bolts for the general trades. 6. Edge angles cast in concrete. 7. Steel posts supporting lintels. 8. Steel ladders. 9. Galvanizing of selected items. 10. Base plates, setting plates and anchor bolts for canopy columns. 11. Canopy columns. 12. Canopy beams.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the pertinent provisions of the following: 1. ASTM Standard Specifications:

a. A36 - Structural Steel. b. A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. c. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products. d. A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. e. A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi, Tensile Strength. f. A325 - Structural Bolts, Heat-Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. g. A366 - Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Cold-Rolled. h. A490 - Heat Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. i. A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds

and Shapes. j. A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. k. A563 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. l. A780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. m. A992 - Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing. n. B633 - Electro-deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. o. D520 - Zinc Dust Pigment for Paint.


p. E488 - Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. q. E1512 - Testing Bond Performance of Adhesive-Bonded Anchors. r. F436 - Hardened Steel Washers. s. F1554 - Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength.

2. AISC publications: a. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (excluding Section 4.2.1). b. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for

Buildings. c. Detailing for Steel Construction. d. Manual of Steel Construction. e. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.

3. AWS Publications: a. ANSI/AWS A5.1 - Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Arc Welding. b. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

4. American Hot-Dip Galvanizers Association. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act. 6. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.

1.4 CONNECTION DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Fabricator: 1. Responsible for the structural design of all connections except those specifically indicated

on the Drawings as Engineer designed. 2. Responsible for the design of moment connections where indicated on the Drawings. 3. Coordinate type of connection (bolted or welded) with steel erector.

B. General Types of Connections: Indicated on Drawings.

C. Design of Connections: 1. Equal to standard framing connections in accordance with AISC - Manual of Steel

Construction. 2. Minimum Load Connection:

a. Two 3/4-inch diameter bolts, or b. Welds with a total capacity of 6,000 pounds.

3. Beam connections shall be designed for a shear capacity equal to the greater of the following: a. 1/2 the total allowable uniform load capacity of the beam in accordance with the AISC

Manual of Steel Construction, Section 2, or b. The actual shear load due to the combination of all loads as indicated on the Drawings.

4. Connections: Bolted bearing type unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 5. By a Registered Professional Engineer licensed to practice at the location of the Work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For all members to be furnished to include: 1. Detail Drawings of Members and Connections:

a. In accordance with AISC - Detailing for Steel Construction. b. Size and number of bolts. c. Dimensions.


d. Connection angles and plates. 2. Erection Drawings: Locate and identify members. 3. Welding: In accordance with AWS welding symbols. 4. Type of paint.

B. Certification: 1. Proof of acceptable quality control program. 2. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Manufacturer's certification that products supplied for this

Project comply with this specification. 3. Weld Filler Materials: Manufacturer's certification that products supplied for this Project

comply with this specification.

C. Mill Certification Tests: Submit in compliance with International Building Code - 2006, Table 1704.3.

D. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other devices.

E. LEED Submittal: Product Data for Credit MR4.1 and 4.2 for products having recycled content indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.


A. Fabrication and Erection Personnel Qualifications: 1. Trained and experienced in the type of work being performed. 2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.

B. Welders, Welding Operators and Tackers Qualifications: 1. Qualified by tests in accordance with Section 5 of AWS D1.1. 2. Qualification Papers:

a. Given by an independent testing laboratory. b. Dated no earlier than 6 months prior to beginning of Project.

3. Engineer, at Engineer's discretion, may accept evidence of previous qualifications.

C. Steel Fabricators: 1. Certified under the AISC Quality Certification Program for Category I - Conventional Steel

Structures, or under other quality control program acceptable to building official in accordance with building code, prior to fabrication.

2. The quality control program shall permit work on fabricator’s premises without special inspection.

D. Testing of Welds, Bolts and Shear Studs: In accordance with Division 1 Section “Testing Services.”

E. Inspection of Steel Fabrication and Erection: In accordance with Division 1 Section “Inspection Services.”



A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.

B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration, damage, contamination with foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.

C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or distorted material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace rejected materials with new material at no additional cost to Owner.

D. Embedded Items: 1. Includes anchor rods and other anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place

concrete or masonry. 2. Delivered on the Project Site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete

or masonry operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Materials shall be new, top quality of their respective kinds, standard sizes and fabricated in a shop whose principal business is manufacturing the items specified in this Section.

B. Yield Stress and Type of Steel: 1. For Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A992 with yield stress of 50,000 psi. 2. For S Shapes, Channels, Angles, Bars, Plates and Rods: ASTM A36 with yield stress of

36,000 psi. 3. For Rectangular and Square Tubular Shapes: ASTM A500 with yield stress of 46,000 psi. 4. For Round Tubular Shapes: ASTM A501 with yield stress of 36,000 psi, or ASTM A53

with yield stress of 35,000 psi.

C. Paint: In accordance with Division 9 Finishes.

2.2 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Edge Angles Cast In Concrete: ASTM A36 steel.

B. Steel Ladder: 1. Side Rail: 2-1/2-inch x 3/8-inch steel bar in accordance with ASTM A36. 2. Rungs: 3/4-inch diameter, 12 inches apart. 3. Width: 16-inches. 4. Finish: Painted in accordance with Division 9 Section Finishes. 5. Meet OSHA requirements. 6. Grind exposed edges and welds smooth to the touch.

C. Fasteners: 1. Bolts:

a. Use carbon or alloy steel, ASTM A325 3/4-inch diameter bolts or larger as required by connection design.


b. Use ASTM A490 3/4-inch diameter bolts or larger only if required by connection design.

c. If conditions require that galvanized materials be used, use ASTM A307 or A325 bolts. Do not galvanize A490 bolts, as that could possibly cause hydrogen embrittlement, and will affect hardness.

d. Stainless steel: ASTM F593, used where conditions of severe corrosion could occur. 2. Nuts:

a. Carbon Steel: ASTM A563. b. Stainless Steel: ASTM F594.

3. Washers: a. Hardened Steel Washers: ASTM F436. b. Plain Washers: ASME B18.22.1, round, carbon steel. c. Lock Washers: ASME B18.21.1, helical, spring type, carbon steel.

D. Anchors: 1. Expansion:

a. Wedge style anchor. b. Capable of withstanding 6 times the imposed load capacity in unit masonry and 4

times the imposed load capacity in concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM E488.

c. Hilti Kwik Bolt II; Powers Rawl Power Stud; or equal. d. Submerged or Subject to Becoming Wet: Stainless steel in accordance with ASTM

F593. e. Dry Areas: Mild steel, galvanized in accordance with ASTM B633.

2. Injectable Adhesive Anchors: a. In Concrete or Solid Grouted Masonry: Hilti HIT HY-150; Powers Rawl Power Fast;

or equal. b. In Hollow Brick or Hollow Masonry: Hilti HIT HY-20; Powers Rawl Power Fast with

screen tubes; or equal. c. Anchored Material: Carbon steel or stainless steel rods, or reinforcing bars as

indicated on the Drawings. d. Bonding Strength: Tested in accordance with ASTM E1512.

3. Sleeve Anchors: a. Hilti Sleeve Anchor; Powers Rawl Lok Bolt; or equal. b. Hex, acorn, round, or flat head as situation requires or as indicated on the Drawings. c. Submerged or Subject to Becoming Wet: Stainless steel in accordance with ASTM

F593. d. Dry Areas: Mild steel, galvanized in accordance with ASTM B633.

E. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36.

F. Other Materials: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and as selected by Contractor subject to approval of Engineer.


2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Workmanship: Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion and

defects. 2. Temporary Bracing:

a. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing. b. Keep work in alignment.

3. Welding: a. Steel welding shall be performed in accordance with AISC Specification Section J and

AWS D1.1. b. Filler metal requirements for steel welding processes shall be as shown in Table 4.1 of

AWS D1.1 and AWS A5.1. c. Welding shall be continuous along entire area of contact.

4. Painting: Prime paint metal fabrications in accordance with Division 9 Section Finishes. 5. Items fabricated from structural steel members which are to be architecturally exposed shall

be given special attention for material selection with respect to rolling tolerances, surface finish and straightness.

6. Normal structural steel fabrication tolerances will not be acceptable where in conflict with the intent and requirements of this Section.

7. Curved beam sections shall be fabricated without distortion to top and bottom flange width and thickness.

8. Straightness tolerances, additive to deflection, shall not exceed ± 1/16-inch to 10 feet. 9. All cope, miter, and butt caps on exposed surfaces shall be made to the closest possible

tolerances consistent with metal shop equipment and practice in order to provide a pleasing appearance.

10. Fastening shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness or metal and details of assembly and supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shall be formed to exclude water. Provide holes and connections for the work of other trades.

B. Galvanizing: 1. Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. 2. 2 oz/ sq ft minimum. 3. Galvanize the following items:

a. Items so indicated on the Drawings. b. Bollards. c. Edge angles cast in concrete. d. Lintels.

C. Galvanized Fasteners: 1. Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153. 2. Class C (1.25 oz/sq ft) minimum coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Workmanship: Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion and defects.


B. Erection: Bracing: 1. Provide all shoring, bracing and accessories required for complete erection. 2. Safety and adequacy of bracing and temporary bracing are the responsibility of the

Contractor.

C. Coordination: Supply to appropriate trades items to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry, complete with necessary setting templates.

D. Tightening: 1. Tighten bolts snug-tight as defined by AISC, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2. Tighten bolts in slotted holes using the AISC Turn-of-the-Nut Method, unless indicated

otherwise on the Drawings. 3. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings, finger-tighten nuts in connections where

movement must be permitted, and tighten a jam nut over finger-tightened nut, or peen bolt threads, to prevent nut backoff.

E. Touch-up: 1. After erection is complete, touch up all shop priming coats damaged during transportation

and erection. 2. Prime all field welds, bolt heads, nuts and abrasions using the priming paint specified for

shop priming. 3. Touch up all damaged galvanized areas with a zinc rich paint meeting ASTM D520 and

ASTM A780.

F. Welding: Field welding shall be performed to the same standards and requirements of shop welding.

G. Protection: Where required, provide approved protection against galvanic action between contacts of dissimilar metal or situations that will cause deterioration of metal in contact or associated in any way.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all installed materials and related areas.


ADP Augusta Expansion METAL STAIRS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 51 10- 1

SECTION 055110 - METAL STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Preassembled steel stairs with terrazzo treads.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and

platforms. 2. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings. 3. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for ornamental metal railings. 4. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for metal backing for anchoring railings.


A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition

to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch,

whichever is less.

B. Seismic Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads" and the 2006 International Building Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled

content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.


B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

E. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to

comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

E. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

F. Weld connections to comply with the following:


1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels or tubes as indicated.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. 2. Construct platforms of steel plate tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as

needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. 3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and

headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.

B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.0677 inch. 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet. 2. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld

brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 4. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as

subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

D. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.


ADP Augusta Expansion ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 05 81 10- 1

SECTION 05 81 10 - ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Architectural joint systems for building interiors. 2. Architectural joint systems for building exteriors.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in architectural-joint-system frames furnished, but not installed, in this Section.

2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry wall joint systems. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for liquid-applied joint sealants.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Maximum Joint Width: Widest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.

B. Minimum Joint Width: Narrowest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.

C. Movement Capability: Value obtained from the difference between widest and narrowest widths of a joint opening typically expressed in numerical values (mm or inches) or a percentage (plus or minus) of nominal value of joint width.

D. Nominal Joint Width: The width of the linear opening specified in practice and in which the joint system is installed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Provide the following for each joint system specified:

1. Placement Drawings: Include line diagrams showing plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, blockout requirement, entire route of each joint system, and attachments to other


work. Where joint systems change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect.

2. Architectural Joint System Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier. Include the following information in tabular form:

a. Manufacturer and model number for each joint system. b. Joint system location cross-referenced to Drawings. c. Nominal joint width. d. Movement capability. e. Classification as thermal or seismic. f. Materials, colors, and finishes. g. Product options.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of joint system indicated.

1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes available for each exposed metal and elastomeric seal material.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain architectural joint systems through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of architectural joint systems and are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to Division 1 for product requirements.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

C. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of exterior wall joint systems with roof expansion assemblies to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof expansion assemblies are specified in Division 7.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate.


1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials.

2. Mill Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified). 3. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 for plates, sheet, and strips.

C. Elastomeric Seals: Preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed in metal frames.

D. Moisture Barrier: Flexible elastomeric material, Santoprene.

E. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations.

2.2 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide architectural joint systems of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces.

1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with hairline mitered corners where joint changes direction or abuts other materials.

2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint systems.

B. Design architectural joint systems for the following size and movement characteristics:

1. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Movement Capability: Plus or minus 50 percent. 3. Type of Movement: Seismic.

2.3 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING INTERIORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified in individual subparagraphs below as basis-of-design products or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Construction Specialties, Inc. 2. MM Systems Corporation.

B. Floor-to-Floor Joint Systems:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco 75FCE and 75FTE (type I-4). 2. Type: Elastomeric seal.


a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum. 1) Finish: Mill.

b. Seal Material: Santoprene. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors. 4. Load Capacity: Standard duty.

C. Floor-to-Wall Joint Systems:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco 75FVCE and 75FVTE (type I-5). 2. Type: Elastomeric seal.



3. Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.

D. Wall-to-Wall Joint Systems:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco 75FWG (type I-3). 2. Type: Flat seal.

a. Seal Material: Santoprene. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Wall Corner Joint Systems:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco 75FWGC (type I-1) and TCWWE (type I-2) 2. Type: Elastomeric seal.



3. Type: Flat seal.


F. Wall-to-Ceiling Joint Systems:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco C2C2. 2. Type: Cover plate.

a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum. 1) Finish: Class II, clear anodic.


2.4 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified in individual subparagraphs below as basis-of-design products or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Construction Specialties, Inc. 2. MM Systems Corporation.

B. Architectural Joint Systems for Exterior Walls:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco FCWWE (type E-1) and FCWW (type E-2). 2. Type: Flat seal.


b. Secondary Seal: Manufacturer's standard extruded-elastomeric seal designed to prevent water and moisture infiltration.

2.5 FINISHES


B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces where architectural joint systems will be installed for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to architectural joint system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing joint systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of joint systems.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems.

1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels.

2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect proper joint installation and performance.

3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames.

4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. 5. Standard-Duty Systems: Shim to level where required. Support underside of frames

continuously to prevent vertical deflection when in service. 6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches from

each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.

C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.

1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. 2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat-weld

field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or

pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Terminate exposed ends of joint assemblies with field- or factory-fabricated termination devices.

E. Water Barrier: Provide water barrier at exterior joints and where called for on Drawings. Provide drainage fittings at a maximum of 50 feet or where indicated.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary protection over joints. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial Completion of the Work.


ADP Augusta Expansion ROUGH CARPENTRY NELSON Project 15.00742.01 06 10 53- 1

SECTION 06 10 53 – ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking and nailers.


1. Division 6 Section "Sheathing."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.


3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite-wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

3. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product. b. Provide add Alternate for FSC certified wood.


A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":

1. Miscellaneous lumber.

B. Alternate: Provide pricing for wood products that are not FSC certified.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.


2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber).

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Roof construction. 3. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers.


3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.

C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.



A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

C. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.


B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


ADP Augusta Expansion SHEATHING NELSON Project 15.00742.01 06 16 00- 1

SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing.


1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials.

2. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite-wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

3. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product. b. Provide add Alternate for FSC certified wood.



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

B. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":

1. Plywood.

C. Alternate: Provide pricing for wood products that are not FSC certified.


A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Application: Treat all plywood, unless otherwise indicated.


2.3 WALL SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corporation.

2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 120 inches for vertical installation.

2.4 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 1002.

2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 954.


A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhered flexible flashing membrane with a minimum thickness of 70 mil .

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. DuPont FlexWrap.

B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate wallroof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements.


3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.

3.4 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions.

1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing

flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure

that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.


ADP Augusta Expansion SELF-ADHERED SHEET WATERPROOFING NELSON Project 15.00742.01 07 13 10- 1

SECTION 07 13 10 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.

B. Related Section includes Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition

and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.


A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.


E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Not less than 60-mil thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. b. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Bituthene 4000. c. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol. d. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 700-SM.

2. Physical Properties: a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385. g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at

70 deg F; ASTM D 570. h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

B. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

C. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.

D. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

E. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch centers.

F. Protection Course: At perimeter building walls, see Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for foundation wall insulation which will also serve as protection course over self-adhering sheet waterproofing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by

waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by

plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

F. Bridge and cover expansion joints discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips. 1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet

strip to first and overlap to substrate.

G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135. 1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of

liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows: a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from

corner or install membrane strip centered over corner. b. At plaza deck-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane or sheet strips onto

deck waterproofing and to finished height of sheet flashing.

H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.

3.3 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.


C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-

adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.

D. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

E. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic.

F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

G. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately.

H. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Protect installed board insulation from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


ADP Augusta Expansion BUILDING INSULATION NELSON Project 15.00742.01 07 21 00- 1

SECTION 07 21 00 - BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill). 2. Cavity-wall insulation. 3. Concealed building insulation.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for insulation installed in cavity walls and

masonry cells. 2. Division 7 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for insulation panels installed

with waterproofing. 3. Division 7 Section "Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified as part

of roofing construction. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" and "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall

Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For products having recycled content,

documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.


C. Recycled Content: Provide glass-fiber insulation with recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and

concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project

site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Manufacturers:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning.

2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Knauf Fiber Glass. 4. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and IB; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and of the following nominal density and thermal resistivity: 1. Nominal density of 2.25 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at

75 deg F.


2.4 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

2.5 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Isolatek International. 3. Owens Corning. 4. Roxul Inc. 5. Thermafiber.

B. Mineral-Wool Board, Type II, Unfaced: ASTM C 612, Type II; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Nominal density of 6 lb/cu. ft. (96 kg/cu. m).

C. Provide Mineral-Wool board insulation specifically manufactured for rain-screen applications where used at exterior wall construction.

1. Basis of design: RainBarrier HD; as manufactured by Thermafiber.

2.6 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place.

1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.

B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter.

C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates.


2.7 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior

grade line.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION


A. On units of foam-plastic board insulation, install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates indicated. 1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall

ties designed for this purpose and specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."

3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN RAINSCREEN ASSEMBLY

A. Mineral-wool Board insulation: Install in cavities formed between rainscreen cladding an building sheathing:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities indicated. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Install insulation on spindles adhered to sheathing and retain with self-locking washers. Space spindles as per manufacturer’s recommendations, but not less than five pins per panel.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Mineral-wool Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

3.7 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


ADP Augusta Expansion FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIERS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 07 27 26- 1

SECTION 07 27 26 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fluid-applied membrane air barrier, vapor retarding.

B. Related Section includes Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America.


A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air barrier. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of air barrier.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance and that is an ABAA-licensed contractor, employs certified and registered installers, and complies with ABAA's Quality Assurance Program.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Include installers of other construction connecting to air barrier, including roofing,

waterproofing, architectural precast concrete, masonry, sealants, windows, glazed curtain walls, and door frames.

2. Review air barrier requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum substrate curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, mockups, installation procedures, sequence of installation, testing and inspecting procedures, and protection and repairs.



A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by air barrier manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

C. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER

A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: synthetic polymer membrane.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Synthetic Polymer Membrane:

1) Grace, W. R. & Co.; Perm-A-Barrier Liquid. 2) Henry Company; Air-Bloc 21 or 21S. 3) Rubber Polymer Corporation; Rub-R-Wall Airtight.

2. Physical and Performance Properties: a. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm x sq. ft. of surface area at

1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. b. Membrane Vapor Permeance: Not to exceed 0.1 perm; ASTM E 96.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of air barrier material.

C. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.

D. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.

E. Adhesive and Tape: Air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.

F. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.

G. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low-modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other

contaminants. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air

barrier manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by

plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane.

E. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

F. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

3.3 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1193 and air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation coat strip extending a

minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of air barrier membrane and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.

B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and with air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air barrier membrane at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid air barrier membrane over joint reinforcing strip.

3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION


A. Install strips, transition strips, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials [as indicated].

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.

G. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

3.5 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Apply air barrier membrane to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

D. Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum thickness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: 60-mil dry film thickness.

E. Apply strip and transition strip over cured air membrane overlapping 3 inches onto each surface according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air barrier components.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.


1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed for more than 60 days.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with creosote, uncured coal-tar products, TPO, EPDM, flexible PVC membranes, and sealants not approved by air barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation. END OF SECTION 07272

ADP Augusta Expansion METAL WALL PANELS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 07 41 20- 1

SECTION 07 41 20 - METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels for RTU screens.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Metal Wall Panel Assembly: Metal wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight wall system.


A. General Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:

a. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings.

2. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of wall panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-assembled work.

1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches:

a. Flashing and trim. b. Anchorage systems.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal wall panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

F. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit(s) MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content

a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.


C. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel for period of metal wall panel installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. 2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Interior Finish: Exposed interior finish shall match the exterior color and finish.


B. Panel Sealants:

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.


A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.

2.3 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Corrugated-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with alternating curved ribs spaced at 2.67 inches o.c. across width of panel.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CENTRIA Econolap (EcoScreen) or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA). b. ATAS International, Inc. c. Copper Sales, Inc. d. McElroy Metal, Inc.

2. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.040 inch thick.

a. Exterior Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Panel Coverage: 34.6 inches. 4. Panel Height: 0.75 inch. 5. Perforations: Metal panels shall have a 10% free area. Coordinate hole size and spacing

with architect.


2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS


B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Examine wall framing to verify that structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.


3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to structural support unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. 2. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 3. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 4. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. 5. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices

and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 6. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping

screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.

B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.


1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps; on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight.

7. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (605 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.


B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


ADP Augusta Expansion COMPOSITE METAL PANELS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 07 42 64- 1

SECTION 07 42 64 – COMPOSITE METAL PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Exterior cladding consisting of formed metal composite material (MCM) sheet, secondary supports, and anchors to structure, attached to solid backup.

B. Matching formed metal flashing and trim.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold Framed Metal Framing: Panel support framing.

B. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier behind cladding system.

C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashing components integrated with this wall system.

D. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

D. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

G. ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

H. ASTM D1781 - Standard Test Method for Climbing Drum Peel for Adhesives.

I. ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics.

J. ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

K. ASTM D4145 - Standard Test Method for Coating Flexibility of Prepainted Sheet.

L. ASTM D4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films.

M. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

N. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.


O. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

P. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

Q. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section to verify project requirements, co-ordinate with installers of other work, establish condition and completeness of building substrate, and review manufacturers' installation instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Require attendance by the installer and relevant sub-contractors. 2. Include MCM sheet manufacturer’s representative and wall system manufacturer’s

representative to review storage and handling procedures. 3. Review in detail truck transportation, parking, vertical transportation, schedule, personnel,

installation of adjacent materials and substrate. 4. Review procedures for protection of work and other construction.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Wall System Manufacturer Qualifications.

B. Product Data - MCM Sheets: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including thickness, physical characteristics, and finish, and: 1. Finish manufacturer's data sheet showing physical and performance characteristics. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Fabrication instructions and recommendations. 4. Specimen warranty for finish, as specified herein.

C. Product Data - Wall System: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Physical characteristics of components shown on shop drawings. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation instructions and recommendations. 4. Specimen warranty for wall system, as specified herein.

D. Shop Drawings: Show layout and elevations, dimensions and thickness of panels, connections, details and location of joints, sealants and gaskets, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, trim, flashings, and accessories. 1. Indicate panel numbering system. 2. Differentiate between shop and field fabrication. 3. Indicate substrates and adjacent work with which the wall system must be coordinated. 4. Include large-scale details of anchorages and connecting elements. 5. Include large-scale details or schematic, exploded or isometric diagrams to fully explain

flashing at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches. 6. Include design engineer's stamp or seal on shop drawings for attachments and anchors.

E. Design Data: Submit structural calculations sealed and signed by design engineer, for Architect's information and project record.

F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 12 inches square, representing actual product in color and texture.


G. Test Report: Submit report of full-size mock-up tests for air infiltration, water penetration, and wind performance.

H. Installer’s Qualifications.

I. Certificate: Certify that the work results of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.

J. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Provide within 48 hours of field review. State what was observed and what changes, if any, were requested or required.

K. Maintenance Data: Care of finishes and warranty requirements.

L. Executed Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in State University Construction Fund's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Design Engineer's Qualifications: Design structural supports and anchorages under direct supervision of a Structural Engineer experienced in design of this type of Work and licensed in State of New York.

B. Wall System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. 1. With not less than three years of documented experience. 2. Approved by MCM sheet manufacturer. 3. Submit contact names and phone numbers for at least three references connected with

successful past projects.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section. 1. With minimum 3 years of documented experience. 2. Approved by wall system manufacturer. 3. Submit contact names and phone numbers for at least three references connected with

successful past projects.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent agency experienced in testing assemblies of the type required for this project and having the necessary facilities for full-size mock-up testing of the type specified.

E. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of fabrication workmanship. 1. Locate where directed. 2. Provide panels finished as specified. 3. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 1. Protect finishes by applying heavy duty removable plastic film during production. 2. Package for protection against transportation damage. 3. Provide markings to identify components consistently with drawings. 4. Exercise care in unloading, storing and installing panels to prevent bending, warping,

twisting and surface damage.

B. Store products protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer.


1. Store in well ventilated space out of direct sunlight. 2. Protect from moisture and condensation with tarpaulins or other suitable weather tight

covering installed to provide ventilation. 3. Store at a slope to ensure positive drainage of any accumulated water. 4. Do not store in any enclosed space where ambient temperature can exceed 120 degrees F. 5. Avoid contact with any other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface

damage.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Wall System Warranty: Provide joint written warranty by manufacturer and installer, agreeing to correct defects in manufacturing or installation within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

B. MCM Sheet Manufacturer’s Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written warranty stating that the finish will perform as follows for minimum of 5 years: 1. Chalking: No more than that represented by a No.8 rating based on ASTM D4214. 2. Color Retention: No fading or color change in excess of 5 Hunter color difference units,

calculated in accordance with ASTM D2244. 3. Gloss Retention: Minimum of 30 percent gloss retention, when tested in accordance with

ASTM D523.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wall Panel System Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: Centria "FormaBond II" panel systems

a. MCM thickness: 6 mm. b. Panel Depth: 2 1/2 inch c. Color: TBD from manufacturers full color option.

2. Comparable Products by one of the following manufacturers are allowed. a. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc; : www.crlaurence.com. b. Citadel Architectural Products, Inc; Envelope 2000: www.citadelap.com. c. Firestone Metal Products, LLC; : www.unaclad.com. d. Kanalco Ltd; : www.kanalco.com.

2.02 WALL PANEL SYSTEM

A. Wall Panel System: Metal panels, fasteners, and anchors designed to be supported by framing or other substrate provided by others; provide installed panel system capable of maintaining specified performance without defects, damage or failure. 1. Provide structural design by or under direct supervision of a Structural Engineer licensed in

State of New York. 2. Provide panel jointing and weatherseal using reveal joints and gaskets but no sealant. 3. Anchor panels to supporting framing without exposed fasteners.

B. Performance Requirements: 1. All tests are to be on full-size mock-ups; tests performed previously for other projects are

acceptable provided tested assemblies are truly equivalent to those to be used on this project, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Thermal Movement: Provide for free and noiseless vertical and horizontal thermal


movement due to expansion and contraction under material temperature range of minus 20 degrees F to 180 degrees F without buckling, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects; allow for ambient temperature at time of fabrication, assembly, and erection procedures.

3. Wind Performance: Provide system tested in accordance with ASTM E330 without permanent deformation or failures of structural members under the following conditions: a. Design Wind Pressure: As specified on Structural Drawings. b. Maximum deflection of perimeter framing member of L/175 normal to plane of the

wall; maximum deflection of individual panels of L/60. c. Maximum anchor deflection in any direction of 1/16 inch at connection points of

framing members to anchors. 4. Air Infiltration: 0.06 cfm/sq ft of wall area, maximum, when tested at 1.57 psf in

accordance with ASTM E283. 5. Water Penetration: No water penetration under static pressure when tested in accordance

with ASTM E331 at a differential of 10 percent of inward acting design load, 6.24 psf minimum, after 15 minutes. a. Water penetration is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water on the interior

face of the wall. b. Design to drain leakage and condensation to the exterior face of the wall.

6. Fire Performance: Tested in accordance with, and complying with the acceptance criteria of, NFPA 285; testing must be performed specifically for this project.

C. Panels: 2 1/2 inch deep pans formed of metal composite material sheet by routing back edges of sheet, removing corners, and folding edges. 1. Reinforce corners with riveted aluminum angles. 2. Provide concealed attachment to supporting structure by adhering attachment members to

back of panel; attachment members may also function as stiffeners. 3. Maintain maximum panel bow of 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width and length;

provide stiffeners of sufficient size and strength to maintain panel flatness without showing local stresses or read-through on panel face.

4. Reinforce panels over 36 inches long with metal angle braces 24 inches on center in short direction.

5. Secure members to back face of panels using structural silicone sealant approved by MCM sheet manufacturer.

6. Metallic Finished Panels: Maintain consistent grain of MCM sheet; specifically, do not rotate sheet purely to avoid waste.

7. Fabricate panels under controlled shop conditions. 8. Where final dimensions cannot be established by field measurement before commencement

of manufacturing, make allowance for field adjustments without requiring field fabrication of panels.

9. Fabricate as indicated on drawings and as recommended by MCM sheet manufacturer. a. Make panel lines, breaks, curves and angles sharp and true. b. Keep plane surfaces free from warp or buckle. c. Keep panel surfaces free of scratches or marks caused during fabrication.

10. Provide joint details providing a watertight and structurally sound wall panel system that allows no uncontrolled water penetration on inside face of panel system.

11. For "dry" jointing, secure extrusions to returned pan edges with stainless steel rivets; provide means of concealed drainage with baffles and weeps for water that might accumulate in members of system.


2.03 MATERIALS

A. Metal Composite Material (MCM) Sheet: Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a solid core of extruded thermoplastic material formed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials; core material free of voids and spaces; no foamed insulation material content. 1. Overall Sheet Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.019 inches, minimum. 3. Alloy: Manufacturer's standard, selected for best appearance and finish durability. 4. Bond and Peel Strength: No adhesive failure of the bond between the core and the skin nor

cohesive failure of the core itself below 22.4 inch-pound/inch with no degradation in bond performance, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1781, simulating resistance to panel delamination, after 8 hours of submersion in boiling water and after 21 days of immersion in water at 70 degrees F.

5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

6. Flammability: Self-ignition temperature of 650 degrees F or greater, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1929.

7. Factory Finish: Three coat fluoropolymer resin coating, approved by the coating

manufacturer for the length of warranty specified for the project, and applied by coil manufacturing facility that specializes in coil applied finishes. a. Coating Flexibility: Pass ASTM D4145 minimum 1T-bend, at time of manufacturing. b. Long-Term Performance: Not less than that specified under WARRANTY in PART

1. 8. Color: TBD from manufacturers full color options.

B. Metal Framing Members: Include all sub-girts, zee-clips, base and sill angles and channels, hat-shaped and rigid channels, and furring channels required for complete installation. 1. Provide material strength, dimensions, configuration as required to meet the applied loads

applied and in compliance with applicable building code. 2. Sheet Steel Components: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized to G90/Z275 or zinc-iron alloy-

coated to A60/ZF180; or ASTM A792/A792M aluminum-zinc coated to AZ60/AZM180.

C. Flashing: Sheet aluminum; 0.080 inch thick, minimum; finish and color to match MCM sheet.

D. Anchors, Clips and Accessories: Use one of the following: 1. Stainless steel complying with ASTM A480/A480M, ASTM A276 or ASTM A666. 2. Steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dipped galvanized to ASTM

A153/A153M. 3. Steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dipped galvanized to ASTM

A123/A123M Coating Grade 10.

E. Fasteners: 1. Exposed fasteners: Stainless steel; permitted only where absolutely unavoidable and

subject to prior approval of the Architect. 2. Screws: Self-drilling or self-tapping Type 410 stainless steel or zinc-alloy steel hex washer

head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels.

3. Bolts: Stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners of high-strength aluminum or stainless

steel.


F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, noncorrosive compound free of asbestos, sulfur, and other deleterious impurities; 15 mil dry film thickness per coat.

G. Joint Sealer: As specified in Section 07 90 05, subject to MCM sheet manufacturer's approval.

H. Provide panel system manufacturer's and installer’s standard corrosion resistant accessories, including fasteners, clips, anchorage devices and attachments.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and interfaces with other work.

B. Verify substrate on-site to determine that conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

D. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during installation.

B. Deliver anchorage items to be cast into concrete or built into masonry to appropriate installer(s) together with setting templates.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install products that are defective, including warped, bowed, dented, and broken members, and members with damaged finishes.

B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of MCM sheet manufacturer and wall system manufacturer, as well as with approved shop drawings.

C. Install wall system securely allowing for necessary thermal and structural movement; comply with wall system manufacturer's instructions for installation of concealed fasteners.

D. Do not handle or tool products during erection in manner that damages finish, decreases strength, or results in visual imperfection or failure in performance. Return component parts that require alteration to shop for refabrication, if possible, or for replacement with new parts.

E. Do not form panels in field unless required by wall system manufacturer and approved by the Architect; comply with MCM sheet manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for field forming.

F. Separate dissimilar metals; use gasket fasteners, isolation shims, or isolation tape where needed to eliminate possibility of electrolytic action between metals.

G. Where joints are designed for field applied sealant, seal joints completely with specified sealant.

H. Install flashings as indicated on shop drawings At flashing butt joints, provide a lap strap under flashing and seal lapped surfaces with a full bed of non-hardening sealant.


I. Install square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections maintaining the following installation tolerances: 1. Variation From Plane or Location: 1/2 inch in 30 feet of length and up to 3/4 inch in 300

feet, maximum. 2. Deviation of Vertical Member From True Line: 0.1 inch in 25 feet run, maximum. 3. Deviation of Horizontal Member From True Line: 0.1 inch in 25 feet run, maximum. 4. Offset From True Alignment Between Two Adjacent Members Abutting End To End, In

Line: 0.03 inch, maximum.

J. Replace damaged products. 1. Exception: Field repairs of minor damage to finishes are permitted. 2. Field Repairs to Finishes: Using materials and methods sufficient that repairs are not

discernible when viewed at distance of 10 feet under all typical light conditions experienced at the project.


A. Wall System Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with instructions.

B. Site Visits: Schedule two site visits during execution of installation.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Ensure weep holes and drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dirt and sealants.

B. Remove protective film after installation of joint sealers, after cleaning of adjacent materials, and immediately prior to completion of work.

C. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.

D. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed panel system from damage during construction.


ADP Augusta Expansion THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING NELSON Project 15.00742.01 07 54 30- 1

SECTION 07 54 30 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system. 2. Roof insulation.

B. Section includes the installation of acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Decking."

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 6 Section "Sheathing" for wood-based, structural-use deck panels. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,

flashings, and counterflashings. 4. Division 15 sections for roof drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin.

B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.


A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.


C. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-60. 2. Hail Resistance: MH.

D. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial Solar Reflectance Index not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.

F. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Approvals approved for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulationfasteners for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.


D. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.


1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation,fasteners,roofing accessories, and other components of membrane roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

a. Warranty alternate no. 1: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products Company. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. GenFlex Roofing Systems. e. Johns Manville. f. Versico Incorporated.

2. Thickness: 60 mils , nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: White.

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.


f. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. g. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. h. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. i. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. j. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.3 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.


2.5 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Decking."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.


E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.4 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing.

E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.

2. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

G. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.

3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


ADP Augusta Expansion SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM NELSON Project 15.00742.01 07 62 00- 1

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Formed Products:

a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 7 Section "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for installing sheet metal

flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing. 3. Division 7 Section "Metal Wall Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with

metal wall panels. 4. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof

hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.


B. LEED Submittals:



C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of special conditions. 6. Details of connections to adjoining work. 7. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat. 2. Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or

thicker.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.

H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.


2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop): Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch wide, joint cover plates.

1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch wide, concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.

B. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch Insert thickness thick.

C. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.


2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.


3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24-inch centers.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of .


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."


A. Clean off excess sealants.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


ADP Augusta Expansion ROOF ACCESSORIES NELSON Project 15.00742.01 07 72 00- 1

SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof hatches.


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs for access to roof hatches.

2. Division 7 low-slope roofing Sections for roofing accessories. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal

flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. LEED Submittals:




A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.



A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage.


A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated.

B. Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

C. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M.


A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, 1 inch thick.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

C. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

1. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft.


D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.

E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

F. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.

2.4 ROOF HATCHES

A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated double-wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Bilco Company (The). b. J. L. Industries, Inc. c. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company.

2. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 54 inches . 3. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick. 4. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board. 5. Fabricate units to minimum height of Insert height, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge

system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.

2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.

2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance.

D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.

E. Roof Hatch Installation:

1. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware.

F. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.

3.3 TOUCH UP

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.


ADP Augusta Expansion FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 07 84 20- 1

SECTION 078420 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following:

1. Floor-to-floor joints. 2. Floor-to-wall joints. 3. Head-of-wall joints. 4. Wall-to-wall joints. 5. Perimeter fire-resistive joint systems consisting of floor-to-wall joints between perimeter

edge of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls.


1. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems consisting of metal frames and covers.

2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for systems installed in openings in walls and floors with and without penetrating items.

3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive joint sealants.


A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed.

B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join, and with movement capabilities indicated as determined by UL 2079.

C. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls, provide systems of type and with ratings indicated below and those indicated in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3, as determined by NFPA 285 and UL 2079.

1. UL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint.


D. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following:

a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency.


A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.


B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.


B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.


ADP Augusta Expansion JOINT SEALANTS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 07 92 05- 1

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Acoustical joint sealants.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.

2. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for building expansion joints. 3. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-

rated construction. 4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.


1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

G. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.


C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match adjacent surface.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:


a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation; . b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)Type O (open-cell material)Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or


harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Insert other nonporous joint substrate.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.


C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.


3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.

2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, nonsag, Class 50. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows and elevator entrances.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

2. Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, mildew resistant, acid curing. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.


D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


ADP Augusta Expansion HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES NELSON Project 15.00742.01 08 11 13- 1

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

B. Related Sections

1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction.

2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 3. Division 9 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow

metal doors and frames. 4. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door

controls and operators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

C. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.SUBMITTALS

D. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.

E. LEED Submittals:



F. Shop Drawings: Include the following:


1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with

thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 1) Locations: Exterior doors and interior doors where indicated.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius. 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch thick, end closures or

channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.


2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.


2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:


1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in

metal-stud partitions. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as

follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door

hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 16 Sections.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and

type of installation indicated.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer


manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.


a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.


ADP Augusta Expansion ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 08 41 10- 1

SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for punched openings. 3. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors.

B. Related Section includes Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for curtain-wall systems that mechanically retain glazing on four sides.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,

story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.


2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6

inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.

E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems,

including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): Ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

I. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

J. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems.

B. LEED Submittal:


1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of

moisture in the system to the exterior.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.



B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

D. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

E. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Vistawall FG-3000 thermal multi-plane; or comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 3. Tubelite. 4. YKK AP America Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front. 4. Member Size: 2-inch x 4-1/2-inch.


B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of

250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Narrow stile; 2-1/8-inch nominal width. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches

above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."


1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system.

E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION


A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door

hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.


A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet;

1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.

B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to


provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.


ADP Augusta Expansion DOOR HARDWARE NELSON Project 15.00742.01 08 71 00- 1

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish all items of Finish Hardware specified, scheduled, indicated or required herein except those items specifically excluded from this section of the specification.


1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry." 2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors." 4. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts." 5. Division 10 Section "Operable Panel Partitions."

C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless specifically listed in the hardware sets:

1. Cabinet Hardware. 2. Signs, except as noted. 3. Folding partitions, except cylinders where detailed. 4. Sliding aluminum doors. 5. Chain link and wire mesh doors and gates. 6. Access doors and panels. 7. Overhead and coiling doors.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements of the Specifications.

2. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of the regulations for public building accommodations for physically handicapped persons of the governmental authority having jurisdiction and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act.

3. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80 and state and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels.


B. Hardware Supplier: Shall be an established firm dealing in contract builders’ hardware. He must have adequate inventory, qualified personnel on staff and be located within 100 miles of the project. The distributor must be a factory-authorized dealer for all materials required. The supplier shall be or have in employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).

C. Electrified Door Hardware Supplier:

1. Shall be an experienced door hardware supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials.

2. Shall prepare data for electrified door hardware, including shop drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer’s standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this project.

3. Shall have experience in providing consulting services for electrified door hardware installations.

D. Manufacturer:

1. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Hardware Schedule:

1. Submit number of Hardware Schedules as directed in Division 1. 2. Follow guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute Handbook (DHI) Sequence

and Format for the Hardware Schedule unless noted otherwise. 3. Schedule will include the following:

a. Door Index including opening numbers and the assigned Finish Hardware set. b. Preface sheet listing category only and manufacturer's names of items being

furnished as follows:

CATEGORY SPECIFIED SCHEDULED Hinges Manufacturer A Manufacturer B Lock sets Manufacturer X Manufacturer X Kick Plates Open Manufacturer Z

c. Hardware Locations: Refer to Article 3.1 B.2 Locations. d. Opening Description: Single or pair, number, room locations, hand, active leaf,

degree of swing, size, door material, frame material, and UL listing. e. Hardware Description: Quantity, category, product number, fasteners, and finish. f. Headings that refer to the specified Hardware Set Numbers. g. Scheduling Sequence indicated in Hardware Sets. h. Product data of each hardware item, and shop drawings where required, for special

conditions and specialty hardware.


i. Electrified Hardware system operation description. j. "Vertical" scheduling format only. "Horizontal" schedules will be returned "Not

Approved." k. Typed Copy. l. Double-Spacing. m. 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets n. U.S. Standard Finish symbols or BHMA Finish symbols.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit, in booklet form Manufacturers Catalog cut sheets of scheduled hardware. 2. Submit product data with hardware schedule.

C. Samples:

1. Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering of finish hardware, submit one sample, if required, of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.

2. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units, which are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.

D. Key Schedule:

1. Submit detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final keying instructions have been followed.

2. Submit as a separate schedule.

E. Electrified Hardware Drawings:

1. Submit elevation drawings showing relationship of all electrical and pneumatic hardware components to door and frame. Indicate number and gage of wires required. a. Include wiring drawing showing point to point wire hook up for all components. b. Include system operations descriptions for each type of opening; describe each

possible condition.

F. Submit to General Contractor/Construction Manager, the factory order acknowledgement numbers for the various hardware items to be used on the project. The factory order acknowledgement numbers shall help to facilitate and expedite any service that may be required on a particular hardware item. General Contractor/Construction Manager shall keep these order acknowledgement numbers on file in the construction trailer.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Label each item of hardware with the appropriate door number and Hardware Schedule heading number, and deliver to the installer so designated by the contractor.

1.6 WARRANTIES


A. Refer to Division 1 for warranty requirements.

B. During the warranty period, replace defective work, including labor, materials and other costs incidental to the work. Replace work found to be defective as defined in the General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Furnish each category with the products of only one manufacturer unless specified otherwise; this requirement is mandatory whether various manufacturers are listed or not.

2.2 Provide the products of manufacturer designated or if more than one manufacturer is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers listed. Where only one manufacturer or product is listed, it is understood that this is the owner’s Building Standard and "no substitution" is allowed.

A. Hinges:

1. Furnish hinges of class and size as listed in sets. 2. Numbers used are Ives (IVE). 3. Products of a BHMA member are acceptable.

B. Continuous Gear Hinge:

1. 6063-T6 aluminum alloy, anodized finish (cap on entire hinge painted if specified). Manufacture to template, uncut hinges non-handed, pinless assembly, three interlocking extrusions, full height of door and frame, lubricated polyacetal thrust bearing, fasteners 410 stainless steel plated and hardened. All hinge profiles to be manufactured to template bearing locations, with standard duty bearing configurations at 5-1/8-inch spacing with a minimum of 16 bearings: and heavy duty at 2-9/16-inch spacing with a minimum of 32 bearings. Anodizing of material shall be done after fabrication of components so that all bearing slots are anodized.

2. Length: 1-inch less than door opening height. Fastener 12-24 x 1/2-inch #3 Phillips keen form stainless steel self-tapping at aluminum and hollow metal doors, 12- 1/2-inch #3 Philips, flathead full thread at wood doors.

3. Numbers used are IVES. a. For Wood and Hollow Metal frames:

1) IVES 224HD 2) Equal products by Pemko and Select will also be accepted.

b. For Aluminum and FRP frames: 1) IVES 112HD 2) Equal products by Pemko and Select will also be accepted.

C. Flush Bolts:

1. Manual – Wood and Metal Doors: a. IR-Ives FB458 Series b. Equal product of any B.H.M.A. member.

2. Automatic Flush Bolts:


a. IR-Ives FB41 for Wood Doors and FB31 for Hollow Metal Doors b. Equal product of any B.H.M.A. member.

3. Dust Proof Strikes - furnish with all flush bolts, except at openings having thresholds: a. IR-Ives DP2 b. Equal product of any B.H.M.A. member.

D. Locksets and Latchsets – Cylindrical Type:

1. Locksets shall be Grade 1 unless indicated as Grade 2 in HW Sets: a. Falcon T Series as indicated in HW Sets. Acceptable substitutions are Yale

5400LN, Sargent 10 line, and Best 93K. Grade 2 to be Falcon B Series. Acceptable substitutions are Yale 5300LN, Sargent 7 line, and Best 73K.

b. Trim: Quantum. 2. Provide strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by

latch bolt. Provide strike lips that do not project more than 1/8-inch beyond door frame trim at single doors and have 7/8-inch lip to center at pairs of 1-3/4-inch doors. Provide wrought box strikes on all locks and latches.

E. Exit Devices:

1. All exit devices shall meet ANSI A156.3, 1994, Grade 1 test standards. 2. Devices shall be push through type with stainless steel touch pad design. 3. Center Case: Shall be interchangeable with all functions. 4. Mechanism End Cap: Shall be a stamped or forged metal. Plastic end caps will not be

acceptable. 5. Trim: Shall be heavy-duty type. 6. The following manufacturers will be acceptable providing they meet the above criteria

for exit devices: a. IR-Monarch 18-R Series b. Sargent 80 Series c. Corbin-Russwin ED5000

7. Trim: a. As specified in sets. b. Levers to match lockset design where specified.

F. Removable Mullion: Monarch 4023 Key removable (Match exit device being used.

G. Push and Pull Hardware:

1. Push Plates: Ives 8200 Series 6 x 16 x 0.050 inches. If stile widths will not accept 6 inches, provide stile width less two inches.

2. Push-Pull Units: One inch round rod. Push: Straight push bar, Pull: 90 degree offset, 10-inch centers. Attach top post of pull back to back with latch stile end of push bar, bottom post of pull and hinge stile end of push bar with end caps.

3. Pull, Offset: 1-inch round rod, 90 degree offset, 10-inch centers. 4. Pull Plates: IR-Ives 8303EZ-0 4 x 16 x 0.050 inches. 10-inch center. 5. Manufacturer: Provide push and pull hardware from any member of B.H.M.A.

H. Electric Power Transfer:


1. Transfer power from door frame to edge of door, UL listed R4504. 2. IR-Von Duprin EPT

I. Closers:

1. Refer to door and frame details and furnish accessories such as drop plates, panel adapters, spacers and supports as required to correctly install door closers. State degree of door swing in the hardware schedule.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types: a. IR-Dor-o-matic SC70 or SC80 (when indicated in HW Sets) b. Norton 7500 8500 c. Sargent 351 1430 d. Ryobi 4550 3550

3. Where LCN 4000 Series Closers are indicated in HW Sets, there will be No Substitution.

J. ADA Closers:

1. Shall be LCN 4640 Series. 2. No Substitution.

K. Overhead Holders and Stops:

1. Type, function and fasteners must be same as Glynn-Johnson specified. Size in accordance with manufacturer's selector chart. Plastic end caps, hold open mechanisms and shock blocks are not allowed. End caps must be finished same as balance of unit.

2. Manufacture products using base material of Brass/Bronze for US3, US4, and US10B finished products and 300 Stainless Steel for US32 and US32D finished products.

3. Type, function, and fasteners must be the same as Glynn-Johnson specified. Size in accordance with manufacturer's selector chart. a. IR-Glynn-Johnson. b. Equal products of any BHMA manufacturer.

L. Kick Plates:

1. Furnish 0.050-inch thick 10-inch high x door width less 2-inch at single doors and less 1-inch at pairs. Where glass or louvers prevent this height, supply with height equal to height of bottom rail less 2-inch.

2. Any BHMA manufacturing product meeting above is acceptable.

M. Bumpers:

1. Wrought, forged, or cast, approximately 2-1/2-inch diameter, convex or concave rubber center, concealed fasteners. a. IR-Ives WS407CCV b. BHMA L02101.

N. Wall Stops:

1. Length to exceed projection of all other hardware. Provide with threaded studs and expansion shields for masonry wall construction. Install with slope at top. a. IR-Ives WS33


b. BHMA L12011 or L12021

O. Floor Stops:

1. Half dome. Furnish height to suit undercut. a. IR-Ives FB430 series b. BHMA L12141

P. Thresholds:

1. 1/2-inch high x 4-inch wide. Cope at jambs. 2. Furnish full wall opening width when frames are recessed. 3. Cope in front of mullions if thresholds project beyond door faces. 4. Furnish with non-ferrous stainless steel screws and lead anchors.

a. National Guard as listed in sets. b. Equal of Zero or Reese.

Q. Door Sweeps:

1. Surface Sweeps: a. National Guard as listed in sets. b. Equal by Zero or Reese.

R. Weather-stripping:

1. Apply to head and jamb stops. a. National Guard as listed in sets. b. Equal by Zero or Reese.

S. Smoke and Draft Control Seals:

1. Gaskets must comply with UBC7.2 (1997) Part 2, UL1784 (1995), and NFPA 105 (1999) for use on all ‘S’ labeled wood and hollow-metal Positive Pressure door assemblies.

2. Perimeter Seals: a. National Guard 2525 b. Zero c. Reese

T. Fire and Smoke Seals:

1. Gaskets must comply with UBC7.2 (1997) Part 1 and 2, UL1784 (1995) NFPA 105 (1999) for use on (Category ‘B’) 20, 45, and 60 minute wood door assemblies:

2. Perimeter Seals: a. National Guard 9850 b. Zero c. Reese

3. Meeting Stile Astragal Seals: a. National Guard 9850 b. Zero c. Reese

4. Fire and Smoke Seals for doors with overlapping astragals:


a. National Guard 9850 b. Zero c. Reese

U. Miscellaneous: Furnish items not categorized in the above descriptions but specified by manufacturer’s names in Hardware Sets.

V. Fasteners:

1. Furnish fasteners of the proper type, size, quantity and finish. Use machine screws and expansion shields for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry, and wall grip inserts at hollow wall construction. Furnish machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum doors and frames. Furnish full thread wood screws for attachment to solid wood doors and frames. "TEK" type screws are not acceptable.

2. Sex bolts will not be permitted on reinforced metal doors or wood doors where blocking is specified.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Generally, Dull Chrome, US26D / BHMA 626. Provide finish for each item as indicated in sets.

2.4 TEMPLATES AND HARDWARE LOCATION

A. Furnish hardware made to template. Supply required templates and hardware locations to the door and frame manufacturers.

B. Furnish metal template to frame/door supplier for continuous hinge.

C. Refer to Article 3.1 B.2, Locations, and coordinate with templates.

2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. All cylinders for this project will be supplied by one supplier regardless of door type and location.

B. The Finish Hardware supplier will meet with Architect and/or Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain keying instructions in writing. 1. Supplier shall include the cost of this service in his proposal.

C. Provide a cylinder for all hardware components capable of being locked.

D. Provide cylinders master keyed to new Grand Master Keyed system according to Owner's instructions. Provide two change keys for each cylinder, master and grand master keys as required by Owner.


E. Provide cylinders with construction cores or keying for use during the construction period. When so directed, and in the presence of the Owner's security department or representative, convert construction cores or keying to the final system.

1. Supplier shall include the cost of this service in his proposal.

F. At the request of the Architect and when performing changeover from construction key system to final key system deliver to the Architect or Owner’s Representative the following:

1. 10 each Temporary Construction Keys. 2. 2 each Control Keys. 3. 2 each Grand Master Keys. 4. 4 each Master Keys per master group. 5. 2 each Keys per cylinder.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install hardware according to manufacturers installations and template dimensions. Attach all items of finish hardware to doors, frames, walls, etc. with fasteners furnished and required by the manufacture of the item.

2. Provide blocking/reinforcement for all wall mounted Hardware. 3. Reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum door and frames will

be drilled and tapped for machine screws. 4. Solid wood doors and frames: full thread wood screws. Drill pilot holes before inserting

screws. 5. Continuous gear hinges attached to hollow metal doors and frames and aluminum doors

and frames: 12-24 x 1/2-inch #3 Phillips Keenform self-tapping. Use #13 or 3/16 drill for pilot.

6. Continuous Gear Hinges require continuous mortar guards of foam or cardboard 1/2-inch thick x frame height, applied with construction adhesive.

7. Install weather-strip gasket prior to parallel arm closer bracket, rim exit device or any stop mounted hardware. Gasket to provide a continuous seal around perimeter of door opening. Allow for gasket when installing finish hardware. Door closers will require special templating. Exit devices will require adjustment in backset.

B. Locations:

1. Dimensions are from finish floor to center line of items. 2. Include this list in Hardware Schedule.

CATEGORY DIMENSION Hinges Door Manufacturer's Standard Flush Bolt Levers 72" and 12" Levers Door Manufacturer's Standard


Exit Device Touchbar Per Template Deadlatch Cylinder 43" unless conflicting with push-pull. Deadlock MS Cylinder 43" unless conflicting with push-pull. Hospital Push-Pull Manufacturer's Template Roller Latch At Head Push-Pull Units 42" to centerline of Pull Offset Pulls Suitable for Exit Devices Pulls - Flush Cup 46" Pulls (BTB) 46" Push-Pulls 46" Push Plates 52" Pull Plates 42" Wire Pulls 42" Wall Stops/Holders At Head Astragals Pull side of active leaf Trim Protector Bars Push side of door below lever handle Lock Protectors Pull side of door

C. Final Adjustment:

1. Provide the services of a representative to inspect material furnished and its installation and adjustment, to make final hardware adjustment, and to instruct the Owner's personnel in adjustment, care and maintenance of hardware.

2. Locksets, closers and exit devices shall be inspected by the [finish hardware supplier] factory representative and adjusted after installation and after the HVAC system is in operation, to insure correct installation and proper adjustment in operation. The [finish hardware supplier] manufacturer's representative shall prepare a written report stating compliance, and also recording locations and kinds of noncompliance. The original report shall be forwarded to the Architect with copies to the Contractor, hardware distributor, hardware installer and building owner.

D. Technical and Warranty Information:

1. At the completion of the project, the technical and warranty information coalesced and kept on file by the General Contractor/Construction Manager shall be given to the Owner or Owner’s Agent. In addition to both the technical and warranty information, all factory order acknowledgement numbers supplied to the General Contractor/Construction Manager during the construction period shall be given to the Owner or Owner’s Agent. The warranty information and factory order acknowledgement numbers shall serve to both expedite and properly execute any warranty work that may be required on the various hardware items supplied on the project.

2. Submit to General Contractor/Construction Manager, two copies each of parts and service manuals and two each of any special installation or adjustment tools. Include for locksets, exit devices, door closers and any electrical products.

3.2 HARDWARE SETS


HW SET: 01 DOOR NUMBER: 1022A 1041A 1086A 1105A EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA MULLION KR-F4023 600 MON2 EA FIRE EXIT DEVICE F-18-R-EO 630 MON1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 986 626 FAL 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 DS 689 DOR 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 2 SET SEALS 135NA AL NGP 2 EA DOOR SWEEP C627A AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 425 HD AL NGP HW SET: 02 DOOR NUMBER: 1040A 1087A 1119A EACH TO HAVE: 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 112HD 628 IVE 1 EA ELECTROMAG LOCK 72 X BRACKETS AS REQUIRED (BY

SECURITY CONTR) 628 SCE

2 EA PULL/PUSHBAR 9103EZ-33-0-NO 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4021 X 4020-18G 689 LCN 1 EA AUTO-EQUALIZER 4642 REG 689 LCN 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S 630 GLY 2 EA DOOR SWEEP C627A AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 1013 AL NGP 2 SET WEATHERSTRIP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR SUPPLIER 1 EA ACCESS CONTROL CARD READER BY SECURITY

CONTRACTOR

1 POWER SUPPLY BY ELEC CONTR W/TRANS/RECTIFIER

1 EA PUSHBUTTON 625RD EX (BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR) 630 SCE 1 EA WEATHER RING 8310-800 LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR, WALL

MOUNT 8310-856 LCN

1 EA SCANNER SCAN II-W (BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR) WHT SCE POWER OPERATION FROM EXTERIOR ONLY WHEN MAG LOCKS ARE RELEASED OR AFTER VALID CARD IS USED. OPERATES IN SEQUENCE WITH INTERIOR DOOR


HW SET: 03 DOOR NUMBER: 1040B 1087B 1119B EACH TO HAVE: 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 112HD 628 IVE 2 EA PULL/PUSHBAR 9103EZ-33-0-NO 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4021 X 4020-18G 689 LCN 1 EA AUTO-EQUALIZER 4642 REG 689 LCN 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S 630 GLY 1 EA ACTUATOR, JAMB

MOUNT 8310-818 LCN

POWER OPERATION AVAILABLE AT ALL TIMES. OPERATES IN SEQUENCE WITH EXTERIOR DOOR. HW SET: 04 DOOR NUMBER: 1051F EACH TO HAVE: 1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW4 652 IVE 5 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA ASYLUM LOCK T411P6D QUANTUM 626 FAL 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6221 FS 24VDC (BY SECURITY

CONTRACTOR) 630 VON

1 EA COORDINATOR COR52 X FL20 628 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 RW/RA 689 DOR 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW 630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 1 EA ASTRAGAL ASTRAGAL BY DOOR SUPPLIER 2 EA ACCESS CONTROL CARD READER BY SECURITY

CONTRACTOR

1 POWER SUPPLY BY ELEC CONTR W/TRANS/RECTIFIER


ADP Augusta Expansion GLAZING NELSON Project 15.00742.01 08 80 00- 1

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Glazed curtain walls. 2. Storefront framing. 3. Glazed entrances.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

E. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within


specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 2. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).

2.3 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.


3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article.

2.4 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

2.7 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear float glass or fully tempered float glass as indicated. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.8 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type IG-1: Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass. 1. Basis of Design: PPG Vistacool Caribia with Solarban 70XL; or equal by:

a. Guardian Industries. b. Oldcastle Glass. c. Pilkington.


d. Viracon. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Tinted float glass or fully tempered float glass as indicated. 5. Interspace Content: Argon. 6. Indoor Lite: Clear float glass or fully tempered float glass as indicated. 7. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on third surface. 8. Visible Light Transmittance: 42 percent minimum. 9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 10. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.26 maximum. 12. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Glass Type IG-2: Reflective, low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass. 1. Basis of Design: PPG Solarcool Azuria with Solarban 70XL; or equal by:

a. Guardian Industries. b. Oldcastle Glass. c. Pilkington. d. Viracon.

2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Tinted float glass or fully tempered float glass as indicated. 5. Interspace Content: Argon. 6. Indoor Lite: Clear float glass or fully tempered float glass as indicated. 7. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on third surface. 8. Visible Light Transmittance: 21 percent minimum. 9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 10. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.17 maximum. 12. Provide safety glazing labeling.

C. Glass Type IG-3: Tinted, insulating spandrel glass. 1. Use insulated glass type IG-1 or IG-2 except for indoor lite.

a. See Drawings for locations. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass. 5. Interspace Content: Argon. 6. Indoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass. 7. Opaque Coating Location: Fourth surface.

a. Color to blend with glass type IG-1 or IG-2. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:


1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.


H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

C. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.


E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


ADP Augusta Expansion GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 08 91 10- 1

SECTION 08 91 10 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes conventionally glazed aluminum curtain walls installed as stick assemblies.

B. Related Section includes Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with glazed aluminum curtain walls.


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of manufacturer's standard glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure

indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Design glazed aluminum curtain walls, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Structural-Test Performance: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:


1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.

F. Story Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated. 1. Design Displacement: L/180. 2. Test Performance: Meeting criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when

tested according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures: 1. Temperature Change (Range): Ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

I. Energy Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall have certified and labeled energy performance ratings in accordance with NFRC. 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor

of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06

cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For glazing sealants, including printed statement of

VOC content and chemical components.

C. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazed

aluminum curtain walls, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions.


d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.



B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for glazed aluminum curtain walls by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain walls that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Vistawall Reliance or comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 3. Tubelite. 4. YKK AP America Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front. 4. Member Size: 2-1/2-inch x 7-1/2-inch.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

D. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

F. Framing Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealants.


2.4 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Division 8 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of

250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation

occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.

D. Curtain-Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system.

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."


A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. END OF SECTION 08 91 10

ADP Augusta Expansion FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES NELSON Project 15.00742.01 12 84 00- 1

SECTION 124840 - FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Entrance mats in frames.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slab depression for recessed mats.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Divisions between mat sections. 2. Perimeter floor moldings.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated.

1. Tread Rail: 12-inch long Sample of each type and color.

D. Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."


A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to receive floor mats and frames.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROLL-UP MATS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide C/S Group Pedimat M1 or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Balco, Inc. 2. J. L. Industries, Inc. 3. Kadee Industries, Inc. 4. Pawling Corporation; Architectural Products Division.

B. Roll-up, Vinyl-Rail Hinged Mats: Vinyl-acrylic tread rails 2 inches wide by 3/8 inch thick, with slotted or perforated aluminum hinges.

1. Tread Inserts: 1/4-inch high, 33-oz./sq. yd. weight, level-cut, nylon-pile, fusion-bonded carpet.

2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts: Match Architect's sample. 3. Rail Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 4. Mat Size: As indicated.

C. Surface-Mounted Frames:

1. Tapered Frames: Tapered aluminum frame members, not less than 1-1/2 inches wide, attached to mat at all 4 edges, with welded mitered corners.

2. Solder frame to custom 16 ga. aluminum pan provided by floor mat manufacturer. 3. Location: Access flooring locations. 4. Color: Clear.

D. Recessed Frames:

1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52. 2. Color: Clear. 3. Location: Concrete slab locations.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.


B. Surface-Mounted Frames: As indicated for permanent surface-mounted installation, complete with corner connectors, splice plates or connecting pins, and postinstalled expansion anchors.

C. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices.

1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.

D. Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating.


A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat.

1. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure attachment of frames.

2. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level.

B. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.


3.3 PROTECTION

A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.


ADP Augusta Expansion HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS NELSON Project 15.00742.01 14 20 10- 1

SECTION 142010 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger and service elevators.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete.

2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for the following:

a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening guide-rail brackets.

b. Hoist beams. c. Structural-steel shapes for subsills that are part of steel frame.

3. Division 9 Sections "Carpet Tile" for finish flooring in elevator cars. 4. Division 16 Section for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall

operation and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers.

5. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including fused disconnect switches at machine room door.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section.

B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for the following:

1. Car enclosures and hoistway entrances.


2. Operation, control, and signal systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Include large-scale layout of car control station. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.

C. Samples for Verification: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and signal equipment; 3-inch square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch lengths of running trim members.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1 and elevator design requirements for earthquake loads in ASCE 7.

1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project is 37.7 %g .

2. Project's seismic design category is C. 3. Elevator importance factor is 1.25.

C. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and 407 in ICC A117.1. and 407 in ICC A117.1

D. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252.


A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging.


B. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Handle according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent damage, deterioration, or soiling.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. KONE Inc. 2. Otis Elevator Co. 3. Schindler Elevator Corp.


4. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.

2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete system.

B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide the following:

1. Submersible pump, with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, suspended inside oil tank from vibration isolation mounts.

2. Provide motor with wye-delta or solid-state starting.

C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit.

D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit.

1. Casing for Underground Piping: PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785, joined with PVC fittings complying with ASTM D 2466 and solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564.

E. Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, readily biodegradable, fire-resistant fluid made from vegetable oil with antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives. Hydraulic fluid is approved by elevator manufacturer for use with elevator equipment.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Hydro Safe" by Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc.

F. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units.

G. Guides: Provide either roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, provide guide-rail lubricators or polymer-coated, nonlubricated guides.

H. Provide 120V power connection for elevator smoke detectors.

I. Provide elevator smoke detectors and associated control wiring. Complete with local and state elevator code requirements.

2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator as required to provide type of operation system indicated.


2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

2.5 FINISH MATERIALS

A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

E. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

F. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.

H. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat applications.

2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.

1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1.

B. Materials and Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Enameled-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet.

3. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 1/2-inch fire-retardant-treated particleboard with plastic-laminate panel backing and manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread index of 25 or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range.

4. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 5. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car.


6. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet.

7. Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, with incandescent downlights in the center of each panel. Align ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels.

8. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated.

2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction.

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections.

B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet.

2. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 3. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 4. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.

2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life incandescent lamps and acrylic or other permanent, nonyellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs.

B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mark buttons and switches with standard identification for required use or function that complies with ASME A17.1. Use both tactile symbols and Braille.

2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car control station, either integral with car control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.


D. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served.

1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.

E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units. 2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel.

F. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide the following:

1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.

G. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.

1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on each car.

H. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station, unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 ELEVATOR

A. Passenger Elevator:

1. Basis for design is a holeless, beside-the-car, single-acting, dual cylinder elevator, by Schindler Elevator Corp., Model 330A, General Purpose.

2. Rated Load: 3500 lb . 3. Rated Speed: 125 fpm . 4. Car Enclosures:

a. Inside Width: 80 inches from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 65 inches from back wall to front wall (return panels). c. Inside Height: 96 inches to underside of ceiling. d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car

door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. g. Reveals: Enameled steel. h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. i. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish. j. Ceiling: Model SC08, with Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish k. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides and rear of

car. l. Floor prepared to receive carpet (specified in Division 9 Section "Carpet").


m. Floor Thickness, Including Setting Materials: 3/8 inches above plywood subfloor.

5. Hoistway Entrances:

a. Width: 42 inches . b. Height: 84 inches . c. Type: Single-speed side sliding. d. Fire-Protection Rating: 1 hour. e. Frames : Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Doors : Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. g. Sills : Aluminum, mill finish.

6. Hall Fixtures : Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 7. Additional Requirements:

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

b. Provide blanket hooks and one complete set(s) of full-height protective blankets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.

1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions and conditions were found to be satisfactory.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.

B. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system.

C. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, install underground piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent-cemented fittings.

D. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers.


E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.

F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.

G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 2. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor.


A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies.

B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to service elevator. Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes:

1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage.

2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. 3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces. 4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to

protect elevator and elevator equipment. 5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 6. Provide full maintenance service. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement

of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

7. Restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate elevator(s). Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."


B. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.


ADP Augusta Expansion EARTHWORK FOR BUILDING

NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 1

SECTION 31 20 10 – EARTHWORK FOR BUILDING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDED


1. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. All excavation for the related to

the building and structures shall be unclassified.

2. Drainage course for building slabs-on-grade.

3. Site preparation as described in Part 3 of this Section.


1. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices in Lump Sum Contracts" for authorized additional

unclassified excavation provisions.

2. Division 01 Section "Coordination and Control" for temporary controls and support

facilities.

3. Division 01 Section “Quality Control Testing Services.”

4. Division 01 Section “Temporary Utilities.”

5. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control

measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of

above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

6. Division 31 Section “Sedimentation and Erosion Control”.

7. Division 31 Section "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during

construction.

8. Division 32 Section "Seeding" for planting and lawn areas.

9. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor

retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.

10. Divisions 22, 23 and 26 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical

utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Basis of Bids: Base bids on indicated amount of soil over-excavation below the finished floor

elevation based on removal of existing fill over the entire building footprint as per the

Geotechnical Report...

B. Basis for Payment: Payment for soil over-excavation over the entire building footprint will be

made on actual volume of soil replaced and approved. Actual volume may vary to coincide with


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 2

elevations where satisfactory soils are encountered as determined by an independent testing and

inspecting agency. Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities.

1. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals required for the

over excavation and soil replacement.

2. Unit prices for earthwork are included in Division 01 Section “Unit Prices in Lump Sum

Contracts.”

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

D. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary

flow of pore water.

E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and

dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Professional. Authorized additional

unclassified excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract

provisions for unit prices and changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated

lines and dimensions without direction by Professional. Unauthorized excavation, as well

as remedial work directed by Professional, shall be without additional compensation.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and

electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the

ground surface.

H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation or top surface of a fill or

backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill or topsoil materials.

I. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts and cables, as well as underground services

within buildings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results

for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material

proposed for fill and backfill.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 3

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site and borrow

soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

B. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction

and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused

by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified

according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials testing, as documented according to

ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. The testing agency shall be subject to approval by the

Professional.


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless

permitted in writing by Professional and the User Group and then only after arranging to

provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify Professional not less than 7 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Professional's and User Group’s written

permission.

3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be

removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

1.8 BASIS OF CONTRACT

A. Excavation for this project shall be considered unclassified and shall include all types of earth

and soil, any pebbles, boulders, and bedrock, municipal trash, rubbish and garbage and all types

of debris of the construction industry such as wood, stone, concrete, plaster, brick, mortar, steel

and iron shapes, pipe, wire, asphaltic materials, paper and glass. Unclassified excavation does

not include unforeseen concrete foundations, walls or slabs. All such materials encountered

which are identified by this paragraph as unclassified shall be removed to the required widths

and depths to create a finished product as shown and/or noted on the drawings and as written in

the specifications. No additional compensation shall be made to the contractor for this

unclassified excavation.

1.9 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION

A. Any available data concerning subsurface materials or conditions which is based upon

soundings, test pits or test borings, has been obtained by the retained Professional for its own

use in designing this project. Its accuracy or completeness is not guaranteed by the Professional

and in no event is it to be considered as part of the Contract Plans or Specifications. Contractors

must assume all risks in excavating for this project and shall not be entitled to rely on any


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 4

subsurface information obtained from the retained Professional. Bidders shall therefore make

their own investigation of existing subsurface conditions, and if they do not do so, The

Professional will not be responsible in any way for the consequences. Said subsurface

information is available at the office of Professional. Bidders will be required to sign a standard

form of receipt for this subsurface information; and such bidders shall accept such subsurface

information in accord with the provisions of this section.

1.10 EXCAVATION AND APPROVAL OF BEARING STRATA

A. The Contractor shall perform excavation to construct building foundations, walls and slabs on

grade. All loose material shall be removed from excavations and bottoms shall be carefully

leveled to grade. Verification of suitable bearing shall be obtained from a registered

professional engineer with the Testing Laboratory.

B. Excavated materials to be used for backfill or other purposes shall be piled away from the edge

of the excavation, a sufficient distance to prevent overloading the bank, and graded in such a

way as to prevent surface water form entering the excavated area. Excess material from

excavation not suitable nor required for backfill or other purposes shall be removed from the

site as directed by the Professional. Contractor's attention is also drawn to provisions regarding

soil erosion and sedimentation control.

C. Excavation to full depth is not to be done when rain or freezing conditions are imminent.

Excavated foundation soil surface shall be protected from frost. Where foundation soil surfaces

are damaged by water, mud, or otherwise disturbed, all loose mud or other materials shall be

removed and the surface regraded.

D. The Contractor shall furnish adequate advance notification to the Professional of times when

footing excavations are to be completed so that the bearing quality of bottoms may be inspected

and/or tested and approved. Formwork and concreting shall follow only after this approval.

E. Should the bearing at the levels indicated be found by the Professional to be inadequate, they

may order the excavation carried down to sound bearing. Such excavation shall be classed as

additional work and payment be made on the basis of an agreed price according to the General

Conditions. Should suitable bearing be found at a lesser depth than indicated, the Professional

may order the reduction of excavation specified or shown on the drawings and the Contractor

shall allow a credit for excavation thus omitted on the same basis?

F. Site preparation work required below the footing bearing elevation and below the floor slab on

grade is outlined in Part 3 of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not

available from excavations.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 5

B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP and SM, or

a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 1-1/2” in any dimension,

debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH and PT

according to ASTM D 2487 or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2% of optimum

moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90% passing a 1-1/2” sieve and

not more than 12% passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Structural Fill: See Engineered Fill.

F. Drainage Fill Under Slabs on Grade Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone,

or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100%

passing a 1-1/2” sieve and 0% to 5% passing a No. 8 sieve.

G. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and

natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100% passing a 1” sieve

and 0% to 5% passing a No. 4 sieve.

H. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural or manufactured sand.

I. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL

A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Low-density, self-compacting, flowable concrete material as

follows:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I II or III.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 3/4” nominal maximum aggregate size.

4. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

5. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork

operations.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 6

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,

debris, obstructions and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31

Section "Site Clearing."

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31

Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.

D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against

freezing temperatures or frost.

3.2 SITE PREPARATION

A. General:

1. Existing Fill within the footprint of the building addition as defined in the Geotechnical

Report shall be removed and replaced with structural fill.

2. After removal of the existing fill and prior to the placement of the structural fill, the

subgrade shall be proof rolled with a heavily loaded tandem axle dump truck under the

observation of the geotechnical engineer.

B. Building Footings:

1. Building Footings shall bear on existing virgin soil that has been proof rolled, or

structural fill that is placed and compacted in accordance with this Section. Existing fill

shall not be used as structural fill below the footprint of the building footings.

C. Slab-on-Grade Construction:

1. Slab-on-Grade Construction shall bear on existing virgin soil that has been proof rolled or

structural fill that is placed and compacted in accordance with this Section. The

geotechnical engineer shall evaluate the removed fill. Based on the evaluation by the

geotechnical engineer, a portion of the removed fill may be suitable to serve as structural

fill below the slab-on-grade construction.

3.3 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared

subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to

accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

2. Install a dewatering system, specified in Division 31 to keep subgrades dry and convey

ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 7

3.4 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.5 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: All excavation related to the building construction shall be

unclassified. Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and

subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil

materials and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be

authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials

and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent

construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24” outside of concrete forms other than at footings.

b. 12” outside of concrete forms at footings.

c. 6” outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.

d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.

e. 6” beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.

f. 6” beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24” wider than pipe or 42” wide.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of +1”. If applicable, extend

excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork,

for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms

to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

3.7 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Professional when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Geotechnical Testing Agency determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue

excavation and replace with engineered fill material as directed.

C. After existing fill removal has been completed, proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs

with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do

not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in 1 direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction

perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 8

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15

tons.

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by the Geotechnical Testing Agency, and replace with engineered fill as

directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to

Contract provisions for unit prices.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water or

construction activities, as directed by Professional, without additional compensation.

3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation

of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean

concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by

Professional.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by

Professional.

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile-borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.

Place, grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,

waterproofing and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.

3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.

4. Removing concrete formwork.

5. Removing trash and debris.

6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.

7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow or ice.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 9

3.11 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.

2. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.

3. Under building slabs, use structural fill.

4. Under footings and foundations, use structural fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow or ice.

3.12 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before

compaction to within 2% of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen or contain

frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2% and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit

weight.

3.13 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8” in loose depth for material

compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4” in loose depth for material

compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and

uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight

according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and re-compact top 12” of

existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 98%.

2. Under walkways, scarify and re-compact top 6” below subgrade and compact each layer

of backfill or fill soil material at 95%.

3.14 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 10

2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish

subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: +1”

2. Walks: +1”.

3. Pavements: +1/2”.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2” when tested with a 10’

straightedge.

3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-

on-grade as follows:

1. Place drainage course 6” or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

2. Place drainage course that exceeds 6” in compacted thickness in layers of equal

thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6” thick or less than 3” thick.

3. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not

less than 95% of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. The Contractor shall perform all necessary Quality Control tests and procedures for the

performance of the work in accordance with Section 01400 and this section to produce end

results specified. The Contractor shall maintain clear and orderly records of such tests and

procedures and make them available for field review and approval of the Professional. The

Contractor’s bid shall include the cost of all Quality Control tests.

B. The Contractor shall submit its plan for Quality Control testing to the Professional for review

and comments.

C. Quality Control tests shall include tests on fill material, optimum moisture content and

maximum density and field density test of fill layers. The Q.C. Testing agent shall comment on

the suitability of all subgrades and the subgrades shall be acceptable to the Q.A. Agency.

D. Handwritten copies of field test reports shall be provided to the Contractor. They should be

given to the Contractor and inspector within 2 hours of completion, but in no event shall the

technician leave the site without providing the Contractor and inspector with a copy of the test

results. This shall include density, percent moisture, plan location, elevation, comments and any

other relevant data. Comments shall include any condition that might have an adverse affect on

the operations, including weather, drainage, etc.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 11

E. The Contractor shall request consultation with the Consulting Geotechnical Engineer on any

problems that arise during construction. Copies of the daily in-place soil density tests shall be

faxed to the consultant by the Contractor through the testing agency within 24 hours of the time

the tests are made.

F. The Contractor shall approve each subgrade and each fill layer before proceeding to the next

layer. Any area which does not meet density, percent moisture or other requirements at any

time, shall be suitably reworked and retested by the Contractor at his own expense.

G. The Professional will perform Quality Assurance tests in accordance with Section 01401

deemed necessary for the assurance of the Professional. This does not relieve the Contractor of

his responsibilities. The Owner will bear the cost of Quality Assurance tests.

H. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades of structures, at least 1 test of each soil stratum will be

performed to verify design-bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other

footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when

approved by Professional.

I. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 2922 and

ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and

frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill

layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no

case fewer than 3 tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100’

or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

3.17 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing and erosion. Keep

free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled or where they lose compaction due to subsequent

construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Professional; reshape

and re-compact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,

backfill with additional soil material, compact and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.


NELSON Project 15.00742.01 31 20 10 - 12

3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.

Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Professional.

1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash and debris, and legally

dispose of it off Owner's property.


ADP Augusta Expansion FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM NELSON Project 15.00742.01 33 46 00- 1

SECTION 02710 – FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of a foundation drainage system.

B. Related Section includes the Division 2 Section “Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Structures.”

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the following: 1. ASTM Standard Specifications: F405 - Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Tubing and Fittings. 2. ASTM Standards: F449 -Subsurface Installation of Corrugated Thermoplastic Tubing for

Agricultural Drainage or Water Table Control. 3. AASHTO:

a. M252 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing. b. M288 Geotextiles Used for Subsurface Drainage Purposes.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviation for polyethylene (PE).

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Foundation Drainage System: 1. Perforated pipe. 2. Pipe Bedding and Backfill: Pea stone, wrapped with a geotextile.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Literature: For pipe and geotextile: 1. Dimensions. 2. Details of construction and installation. 3. Connections and fittings. 4. Name of Manufacturer. 5. Model.


A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications: 1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.


2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.

B. Manufacturer's Services: Submit Manufacturer's sworn statement that the material furnished complies with this Specification.


A. Deliver materials original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.

B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration, damage, contamination with foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.

C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pipe: 1. Manufacturer: Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.; Hancor, Inc.; or equal. 2. General:

a. Corrugated polyethylene. b. Size as indicated on the Drawings. c. ASTM F405.

3. Perforated Pipe: a. Slotted perforations without filter pipe wrap. b. For drainage piping only. c. Pipe With Holes: Not permitted.

4. Joints and Fittings: a. Furnished by same Manufacturer as pipe. b. Styles:

1) Split: In conjunction with a noncorroding strap which can be tightened around the coupling.

2) Snap-on: External style only permitted. c. Fittings:

1) Coupler. 2) 45 degree wye. 3) 45 degree and 90 degree elbows. 4) End cap. 5) Tee.

d. Cleanouts: 1) 4-inch diameter solid corrugated. 2) Fittings: 45 degree wye, 45 degree elbow, and cap. 3) Casting:

a) Light duty round slab style with solid lid; 8-inch inside diameter. b) Model R-6003 by Neenah Foundry Company; or equal.

B. Aggregates:


1. Pea Stone: Natural, open-graded washed aggregate with gradation: a. 100% passing 1/2-inch sieve. b. 90 to 100% passing 3/8-inch sieve. c. 0 to 5% passing No. 8 sieve. d. Loss by washing 3.0% passing, maximum.

2. Backfill in accordance with Division 2 Section “Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Structures.”

C. Geotextile: 1. Nonwoven fabric. 2. Conforming to AASHTO M288. 3. Manufacturers:

a. Mirafi 140NS. b. Typar 3401. c. Amoco 4551.

4. Weight: 4.0 ounces per square yard minimum. 5. Burst Strength: 160 psi minimum. 6. Water Flow Rate: 100 gallons/minute/square foot. 7. Grab Tensile Strength: 145 psi minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Alignment and Grade: 1. If there is a grade discrepancy or an obstruction which is not indicated on the Drawings,

notify Engineer and obtain instructions prior to proceeding. 2. Where Underdrain Crosses Another Utility:

a. Expose utility prior to laying underdrain to verify existing depth. b. Maintain minimum clearance of 18 inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or

approved by Engineer. c. Space joints equidistant from crossing.

3. Control: a. Level and Grade Rod: Check line and grade at each structure or clean out, 25 feet, 50

feet, and 50-foot intervals thereafter. b. Allowable Deflection:

1) Horizontal: 0.20 feet. 2) Vertical: 0.10 feet.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in Conformance With: 1. The Submittals reviewed by Engineer. 2. The Manufacturer's recommendations. 3. ASTM F449.

B. General: 1. Line and grade; Provide for outlet to storm sewer. 2. Prevent soil and debris from entering system.


C. Geotextile: 1. Placement:

a. At locations indicated on the Drawings. b. Minimum 12-Inch Overlap:

1) On top of bedding. 2) Between successive sheets in direction of flow.

2. Repair: Place geotextile patch over the damaged area and extend three feet beyond the perimeter of the tear or damage.

D. Pipe Laying: 1. Bearing: Support entire length of pipe barrel evenly. 2. Direction: Commence at outlet and proceed into system. 3. Method:

a. Wipe clean the socket of pipe last laid. b. Center end of pipe to be laid and fasten coupling. c. Center pipe to form an underdrain with a uniform invert.

E. Cleanouts: 1. Prefabricated wye and elbow or double elbow furnished by pipe Manufacturer. 2. Located: As indicated on the Drawings. 3. Refer to standard detail on the Drawings.

F. Connections: 1. To Existing Pipe: Relay pipe length as required and mortar in pipe connection. 2. To Existing Manhole: Core through wall and mortar in pipe connection solid.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Debris: Remove all dirt and debris, including cemented or wedged material from the inside of all pipes, cleanouts and manholes.
